Siaem

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU
ALS series equipment with ALCplus2 IDU management software application Release 1.1
User manual
MN.00237.E - 003 Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice. Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the international regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen displayed is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product. MS-DOS, MS Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation HP, HP OpenView NNM and HPUX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks. UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark. Oracle is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark. Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark. Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system. Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL). Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU Contents
WEB LCT APPLICATION............................................................................................................ 9 WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION .................................................................................. 12 VERSION........................................................................................................................... 13 LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 14 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 15 START-UP .............................................................................................................................. 16 START-UP FROM BROWSER ................................................................................................. 17 To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) ......................................... 17 To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) ............................................... 18 To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection) .............................................. 18 To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem) ...................................... 19 Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT ..................................................................... 20 START-UP FROM SCT/LMT ................................................................................................... 23 WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE ............................................................................................... 25 INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA .......................................................................................... 26 To verify the version of the WEB LCT application............................................................... 28 To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page..................................................................................................... 28 To execute the login of the user ..................................................................................... 28 To execute the logout of the user ................................................................................... 29 CONTEXTUAL AREA............................................................................................................. 30 EVENTS LIST AREA ............................................................................................................. 33 To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals.............................. 34 Alarm and status signals (more info) ............................................................................... 34 MAIN MENU ........................................................................................................................... 35 EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES .................................................................................................... 36 To verify the equipment properties ................................................................................. 36 To modify the equipment identifier.................................................................................. 37 To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment............................................ 37 To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 37 To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC ............ 37 PORT CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................... 38 To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment ................................................................. 38 Ethernet port ......................................................................................................... 39 LCT PPP port .......................................................................................................... 40 Radio 1A port ......................................................................................................... 40 2Mb/s EOC port ...................................................................................................... 41
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003
IP Over OSI port..................................................................................................... 42 To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 43 ROUTING TABLE................................................................................................................. 44 To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) ...................................... 44 To add an element to the Routing Table........................................................................... 45 To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table................................................... 45 To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway ...................................................... 46 To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway ............................................................ 46 Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ................................................................ 46 STORED ROUTING TABLE .................................................................................................... 48 To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway)....... 48 To add an element into the Stored Routing Table .............................................................. 49 To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ........................................ 50 To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ............ 50 To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table................... 50 REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE .................................................................................................... 51 To verify the remote equipment list................................................................................. 51 To add a station to the list ............................................................................................. 52 To rename a station of the list........................................................................................ 52 To remove a station of the list ........................................................................................ 53 To add an equipment to the list ...................................................................................... 53 To remove an equipment from the list ............................................................................. 54 To reset the remote equipment list ................................................................................. 54 Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................. 54 PERFORMANCE MONITORING ............................................................................................... 56 Measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment.......................................................... 57 Quality parameters description (PM measures) ................................................................. 58 To verify the status of the PM measures .......................................................................... 61 To activate a PM measure .............................................................................................. 62 To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously ................................................ 62 To deactivate a PM measure........................................................................................... 62 To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously .............................................. 63 To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms ............ 63 G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure........................................................... 64 G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure ...................................................... 69 G828 Radio <radio branch> measure ........................................................................ 74 G828 E1 Line Side measure ..................................................................................... 78 G828 E1 Radio Side measure ................................................................................... 82 G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure ......................... 84 ACM Radio A measure ............................................................................................. 89 RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure....................................................................... 95 TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure ....................................................................... 98 PM measures (more info)..............................................................................................101 REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE...................................................................................102 To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to file .........................................................................................102 To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller .................................................105 To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller .......................................105 SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION......................................................................................106 To verify the SNTP functionality .....................................................................................106 To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ..................................107 To disable the SNTP functionality ...................................................................................107 To verify the Wake Up functionality status ......................................................................108 To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality .............................108 To disable the Wake Up functionality ..............................................................................109
Server NTP functionality (more info) ..............................................................................109 Wake Up functionality (more info)..................................................................................110 SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................111 To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory.............................................111 To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit .................................................................................................................113 To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory.....................114 To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory......................................115 To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory ............115 To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory ......................................116 To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD memory .........................................................116 To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller..............................................................................116 To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ..............116 SD memory card (more info).........................................................................................117 SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................119 To verify the firmware version of the equipment ..............................................................119 To update the firmware of the equipment .......................................................................120 To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller .................121 To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ................................................121 To update the WEB LCT application ................................................................................122 To verify the communication stack in use........................................................................122 To modify the communication stack in use ......................................................................123 To execute the equipment software reset........................................................................123 Update of the equipment firmware (more info) ................................................................124 BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................125 To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ....................................125 To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) .................125 To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) ........................................126 Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info) ...............................................126 UNIT LIST ........................................................................................................................127 To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration) ..............................127 ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION ..............................................................................................129 To verify the active manual operations ...........................................................................129 To verify/modify the manual operation timeout................................................................130 ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................131 To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .......................131 To enable/disable an alarm ...........................................................................................132 To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm...................................................132 To change the severity level of an alarm .........................................................................133 Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info) .......................................................133 VIEW LOGGED USER..........................................................................................................134 To verify the users connected to the equipment ...............................................................134 To force the logout of a user .........................................................................................135 USER MANAGER ................................................................................................................136 To verify the user list ...................................................................................................136 To add a user to the list ...............................................................................................137 To modify a user into the list.........................................................................................137 To delete a user from the list ........................................................................................138 To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Password) .................138 To change the network password and timeout (Network Password) ....................................138 To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) .........................139 To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment of remote users......................................................................................139
User list (more info).....................................................................................................140 FEATURES MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................141 To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment .....................................................141 To enable the new functionalities ...................................................................................142 RMON ..............................................................................................................................143 To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports ....................................................................................143 To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ................................144 To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port.............................144 To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)..............................144 Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT ...................146 EQUIPMENT MENU ............................................................................................................... 148 MAIN MENU ......................................................................................................................149 EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................150 Configurator ...............................................................................................................151 To verify/modify the radio configuration....................................................................151 To verify/modify the management of STM-1 stream ...................................................153 To verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................153 To verify/modify the management of nodal configuration ............................................153 To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) ...........154 To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) .........154 To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus) .................154 To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus)...............154 To verify/modify the protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus)...............................155 Mod. Cap/Link ID.........................................................................................................156 To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation ............................................156 To display the table summarizing the radio transport ..................................................158 To modify the reference band/modulation .................................................................159 To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation ..........................................159 To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) .................................159 To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) 160 To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) ........160 To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) ...160 To verify/modify the link identification number ..........................................................160 To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) ......................161 Adaptive modulation (more info)..............................................................................162 General Preset ............................................................................................................164 To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ......................................164 To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission .........................................164 To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) ......................................165 To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) .......................166 To verify/modify the radio branch label .....................................................................166 SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................167 To verify the status of the synchronism sources ...............................................................167 To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input ...............................................169 To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input......................................171 To force the use of a synchronism source in input ............................................................171 To set a synchronism source in input as preferential.........................................................172 To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2.........................................172 To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ................................172 To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input ................................................173 To force the status of the T0 synchronisation...................................................................173 To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism .................................................................173 To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B ......................................................................................174
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation..........175 Management of synchronisation (more info) ....................................................................176 Synchronism sources in input ..................................................................................176 Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................179 Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................179 Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....180 BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................182 Ethernet Switch...........................................................................................................183 To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table...........183 To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .........................................185 To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ........................................185 To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue ......185 To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its Tag 802.1p .....................................................................................185 To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated .......................................................................186 To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) ....................................186 To verify the existing virtual LANs ............................................................................187 To create a virtual Lan............................................................................................189 To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan...............................................................189 To delete a virtual Lan............................................................................................190 LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 ..........................................................................................191 To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4).........192 To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) ........................................................194 To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................195 To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................195 To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ............................................................196 To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) 196 To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) ........................................................196 To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) .......................196 To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) ...........................197 To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ......197 To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ...............................................................199 To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................199 To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................200 To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................200 To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ...................................201 To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ...........202 To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................202 To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................202 To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................204 To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP) .....204 To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(STP/ELP) .............................................................................................................204 To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................204 To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................205 To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ............................................................206 To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................207 To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ........................208 To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ................................209 To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ............209 To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) .......209 To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ....................210 To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)...................210 Port A ........................................................................................................................211 To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port .............................................211 To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for the internal port....................................................................212 To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port ...........................................212 To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port ....................................................................................................214 To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output ..........214 To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value..................................215 To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port ..215 To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue ................................................................215 To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to ................................................216 To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port) 217 To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol............217 To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port................................218 To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP) ................................................219 To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP) ....................................219 Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................220 To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol .........................................220 To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................221 To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................221 To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................222 To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol .........222 To verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................223 To verify/modify the priority of a bridge ....................................................................224 To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection .........224 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info) .................................................................225 Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info) ................................................................225 TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................227 E1 .......................................................................................................................228 STM-1 ..................................................................................................................231 VC-4 ....................................................................................................................240 VC-12 ..................................................................................................................245 Cross Connection.........................................................................................................251 To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format.....................................251 To display the connections of the equipment in table format ........................................257 To execute a Tributary-Radio connection...................................................................258 To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection..............................................................258 To delete one or more connections...........................................................................259 To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ..............................................259 To disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................260
To verify/modify the connection label .......................................................................260 To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) ......................261 Cross connection matrix (more info).........................................................................261 RADIO .............................................................................................................................265 Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................266 To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ....266 To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .............................................268 To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter .......................................................268 To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply................................................268 To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .........................................269 To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx).....................................269 To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ....................................................269 To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter ..........................271 To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device....................271 To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/ reception for every ACM profile ................................................................................271 MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................273 LAN Statistics..............................................................................................................274 To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports........274 To reset the counters results ..................................................................................276 S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................277 To verify the measure of the S/N ratio ......................................................................277 Fade Margin................................................................................................................278 To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Margin) 278 Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin .......................................280 To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin................................................................280 Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info) .............................................281 PRBS .........................................................................................................................282 To verify the PRBS measure status...........................................................................282 To activate/reset the PRBS measure.........................................................................283 To deactivate the PRBS measure..............................................................................283 To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure ..................................283 To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................284 Radio Loop .................................................................................................................285 To verify the radio loops status................................................................................285 To activate a radio loop ..........................................................................................286 To deactivate a radio loop .......................................................................................286 Radio loop (more info)............................................................................................286 Radio Switch A ............................................................................................................287 To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches ...................287 To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) .................288 To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch).............288 To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)..........289 To modify the Wait Time parameter .........................................................................289 To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............................................................................................................289 Radio switch (more info).........................................................................................289 SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................291 STM-1........................................................................................................................292 To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ....................292 To modify the management of the STM-1 switch ........................................................293 To modify the logic of STM-1 switch .........................................................................294 To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential........................................................294 To modify the Wait Time parameter .........................................................................294 To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............................................................................................................294
STM-1 switch (more info)........................................................................................295 Nodal Bus...................................................................................................................296 To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .....................296 To modify the management of the nodal switch .........................................................297 To modify the Wait Time parameter .........................................................................297 To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration.........................................................................................297 Nodal switch (more info).........................................................................................298 USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................299 Local User Input ..........................................................................................................300 To verify the local user input status..........................................................................300 To verify/modify the name of a local user input..........................................................301 To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input ..............................................301 To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input ............301 Enabling the user input alarms (more info)................................................................302 Remote User Input ......................................................................................................303 To verify the remote user input status ......................................................................303 To change the name of a remote user input ..............................................................304 To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input ........304 USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................305 To verify the user output status.....................................................................................305 To verify/modify the name of an user output ...................................................................306 To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user output .....................306 To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output ....................................................306 To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ....................................307 To force the user output activation.................................................................................307 To remove the forcing of the user output ........................................................................307 ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 308 OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 313 PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 321 GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................................... 327 ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 330
WEB LCT APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation, etc.) using the operating system* and the Web browser at his disposal. WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module installed on the user PC, except for the SCT/LMT program or the WEB Lct Console program, necessary to WEB LCT for the management of the file transfer between PC and equipment (FTP), of the serial/USB/modem connection (PPP) and of the help on-line of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).
* For operating systems different from MS Windows, a FTP server, an Help WEB server and a PPP management module must be installed on ones PC.
The WEB LCT application can be started: From browser (see Fig.1). In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage 2 machines at most: local equipment (equipment which you are connected to) and remote equipment (equipment defined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment). From SCT/LMT program (see Fig.2). In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is opened. Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage: The equipment configuration: radio configuration, capacity, modulation, RF channels, tributaries, parameters, etc. (pag.148). The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and to execute the reset of the equipment software (pag.36). The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment (pag.38). The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (pag.44). The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (pag.48). The remote equipment list (pag.51). The measures of Performance Monitoring (pag.56). The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the operations executed by the users (pag.102). The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap (pag.106). The memory card SD for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software (pag.111). The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment and the communication stack used by the equipment (pag.119). The back-up/restore of the whole equipment configuration (pag.125). The hardware constituting the equipment (pag.127). The manual operations and the relevant timeout (pag.129). The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (pag.131). The users connected to the equipment (pag.134). The equipment users list (pag.136). The functionalities enabled for the equipment (features key) (pag.141). The statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment (pag.143).
In order to access the WEB LCT page, a valid SCT/LMT user (username and password) is necessary. With valid user (username and password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller (see pag.140). It is possible to open: More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or different users. Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment. More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the specific paragraph (pag.14).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
10
Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)
11
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION

The WEB LCT application is called WEB LCT <equipment type> depending on the equipment type to manage. This guide describes the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2 IDU. In this guide, to make the writing easier, the wording: WEB LCT identifies the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application. ALCplus2 IDU identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2 IDU.
12
VERSION
The version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment controller can be verified opening the relevant WEB LCT page and executing one of the following operations: Select the About tab. Select the command Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance > Web LCT tab.
13
LIMITS
Maximum number of... Equipment into the remote equipment list Stations into the remote equipment list Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB LCT page Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT e NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to an equipment via the WEB LCT page Signals into the Events List area
Limit 100 30 2* 2 400
* If the WEB LCT page is opened from browser (local equipment and remote equipment - see Fig.1). If the WEB LCT page is opened from SCT application, the user can connect only to the local equipment (see Fig.2).
14
INSTALLATION
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any installation on the user PC. To install or update the WEB LCT application present in an equipment, see pag.122.
As help to the WEB LCT application for the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is necessary to use the SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console program. The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the relevant manuals.
15
START-UP
WEB LCT can be run: From browser (pag.17). In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage the local equipment (equipment which you are connected to) and the remote equipment (equipment defined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment). From the SCT/LMT program (pag.23). In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is opened.
For the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is necessary to start even the SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console (WLC) program. The instructions to start the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the relevant manuals.
16
START-UP FROM BROWSER

The following procedure requires that: The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to. The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller.
Depending on the type of used physical connection PC-equipment, follow the specific procedure: To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) - pag.17. To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) - pag.18. To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection) - pag.18. To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem) - pag.19.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection)

If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more network cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web Lct Console user manual). When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
1. If not already active, run WLC program (see relevant documentation). 2. Run a browser. 3. Type in the address box: http://<IP address of the local equipment> With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach the equipment itself. The WEB LCT login page opens. 4. Type, into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user to use to activate the connection. 5. Type, into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user. 6. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the WEB LCT application of the considered equipment, the current username and password are automatically displayed. Otherwise uncheck the considered box. 7. Press Login. If the typed values are correct, the WEB LCT page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment is displayed. Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU pages. The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment are the same and are described in Fig.5. As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT go to pag.20. After the opening of the WEB LCT page depicted in Fig.3, the Login page of the browser remains available pointing out the characteristics of the connected equipment. In any moment, it is possible to close the WEB LCT page and re-open it without executing the login but simply selecting the label Click here in the Login window.
17
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection)

If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the USB driver must be installed and configured (see Web Lct Console user manual). Then, if you think the USB driver does not operate correctly, execute the controls pointed out in the Web Lct Console user manual. When the equipment is connected to PC via an USB connection, the connection management is implemented by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the USB cable. 2. If not already active, run Web Lct Console program and open the relevant graphical interface (see relevant documentation). The Web Lct Console window opens. 3. Press Options. The Options window opens. 4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area. 5. Press Ok. 6. Execute one of the following operations: In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect. Select , press the right button of the mouse and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
If the connection operation is successful, the default browser is opened with the WEB LCT login page. 7. Type, into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user to use to activate the connection. 8. Type, into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user. 9. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the WEB LCT application of the considered equipment, the current username and password are automatically displayed. Otherwise uncheck the considered box. 10.Press Login. If the typed values are correct, the WEB LCT page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment is displayed. Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU pages. The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment are the same and are described in Fig.5. As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT go to pag.20. After the opening of the WEB LCT page depicted in Fig.3, the Login page of the browser remains available pointing out the characteristics of the connected equipment. In any moment, it is possible to close the WEB LCT page and re-open it without executing the login but simply selecting the label Click here in the Login window.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection)

If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are generally not necessary as, at the installation of WLC, the Remote Access (LctDirectPPP) is automatically installed and configured. If you think the Remote Access does not operate correctly, verify its configuration as points out in Web Lct Console user manual. When the equipment is connected to PC via the serial connection, the connection management is implemented by WLC program.
18
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the serial cable. 2. If not already active, run Web Lct Console program and open the relevant graphical interface (see relevant documentation). The Web Lct Console window opens. 3. Press Options. The Options window opens. 4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area. 5. Press Ok. 6. Execute one of the following operations: In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect. Select , press the right button of the mouse and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem)
If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the default modem must be configured (see Web Lct Console user manual). When the equipment is connected to PC via modem, the connection management is implemented by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to ones PC by means of the modem. 2. If not already active, run Web Lct Console program and open the relevant graphical interface (see relevant documentation). The Web Lct Console window opens. 3. Press Options. The Options window opens. 4. Select the Connect using a modem option in the PPP area. 5. Press Ok. 6. Execute one of the following operations: In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect. Select , press the right button of the mouse and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
19
Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT

At the start of WEB LCT, the display of the message: Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility.... The WEB LCT program is not present on the equipment you wish to connect to. In order to install WEB LCT, follow the procedure To update the WEB LCT application (pag.122) starting from step 3. Warning: in order to view the contents you must install Adobe Flash Player.... It is necessary to install or to update the version of Adobe Flash Player present on ones PC for a correct use of WEB LCT. The program can be installed/updated from the web site: www.siaemic.com > Login (to access to the Download area the registration is necessary) > Download area - Software > WEB LCT (Windows version) > Adobe Flash Player... www.adobe.com.
Login Fail. Problem: Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the equipment user list or that the user password is wrong. Login Fail. Problem: The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/ NMS5LX supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/ LMT user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.
Login Fail. Problem: To many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.14).
20
Fig.3 WEB LCT page (local and remote equipment)
Fig.3 notes (1) The local equipment is the equipment which you are connected to (equipment which the IP address typed in the command line of the browser corresponds to). At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the local equipment with the user/profile entered during the login request. In any moment it is possible to execute the logout (pag.29) and re-execute the login (pag.28) using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login. If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervisory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only profile a LCT connection in Monitoring mode. While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a SCT/LMT user with Station Operator or System profile a LCT connection in Configuration mode. (2) For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY insert in the remote equipment table of the local equipment: The local equipment with type Managed by SCT. The remote equipment with type Remote Link.
21
If an equipment of type Remote Link is not present in the remote equipment table, the message Warning: Unable to open remote element interface... is displayed in this area, pointing out the absence of the remote equipment. Select the label Click here to display, in the WEB LCT page of the local equipment, the Remote Element Manager contextual area (see Fig.15) where the remote equipment table can be managed. At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the remote equipment in Monitor modality. In order to set or modify the parameters of the remote equipment, the user shall execute the login for the remote equipment. Even for the remote equipment, in any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the first login. If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the application will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Remote Link type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to the local equipment, to the other side of the radio link. In the remote equipment table, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address. Moreover, the bar Remote Element List is displayed on the right side of the WEB LCT page of the local equipment: selecting the bar, the Available Remote Element List pop-up window is displayed, where the equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list is listed. For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported: Station. Station name. Equipment ID. Equipment identifier. IP Address. IP address. Radio Direction. Radio direction (radio branch) Radio Link Status. Radio link status between local and remote equipment. Wording: Link Up (green). The radio link is active. Link Down (red). The radio link is inactive. Connected (green). The connection is active. Unreacheable (red). The connection is inactive.
Conn. Status. Connection status between equipment and WEB LCT page (PC). Wording:
Selecting an equipment in the list, the relevant WEB LCT page is displayed. For example, if the following remote equipment list is defined for the local equipment A: Equipment B - 172.18.10.23 - Remote Link Equipment C - 172.18.10.25 - Remote Link At the opening of the WEB LCT page of equipment A from browser, the WEB LCT pages of equipment A and equipment B (equipment of type Remote Link present in the Remote Element Table with lowest IP address) will be displayed. In order to display the WEB LCT page of equipment C, instead of that of equipment B, it is sufficient to open the Available Remote Element List window and select the area pointing out the characteristics of equipment C. To close the Available Remote Element List pop-up window, select the bar Remote Element List.
22
START-UP FROM SCT/LMT

The following procedure requires that: The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to. The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller. The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported in the relevant documentation.
1. If not already active, run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation). 2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation). 3. Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window or selecting the record of the equipment and the Equipment > LCT Interface command. The WEB LCT page of the equipment opens. Fig.4 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page. The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page are described in Fig.5. At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window. In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout (pag.29) and re-execute the login (pag.28) using the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login. If both the LCT module and the WEB LCT module are available for a given equipment type, the selection of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window and the successive selection of the LCT Interface command automatically open the LCT equipment interface. Some equipment types have only the WEB LCT program and not the LCT module. In this case, when the LCT Interface command is selected, a message is displayed warning that, for the considered equipment type, only the WEB interface is available. The message is displayed even if the selected equipment type has the LCT module but this has not been installed on ones PC.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the connection type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more information, refer to the relevant documentation.
23
Fig.4 WEB LCT page (local equipment)
24
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE
Fig.5 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page subdivided in the following areas: Info/status equipment area (pag.26) Contextual area (pag.30) Events List area (pag.33)
Fig.5 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page
25
INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA

The info/equipment status area points out the characteristics and the connection status of the equipment as depicted in Fig.6. The information displayed in the area are updated at regular intervals depending on the timeout set by the user. Moreover, by means of the items present in the area, it is possible: To verify the version of the WEB LCT application (pag.28). To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page (pag.28). To execute the login of the user (pag.28). To execute the logout of the user (pag.29).
Fig.6 info/status equipment area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.6 notes (1) (2) (3) The wording ALCplus2 IDU points out the ALCplus2 IDU radio equipment. The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment. Label: Read & Write, Station Op or System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user who has required the login has, respectively, a profile of type Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status the user who has required the login has profile of type Read Only.
(4)
Tab: About. Displays the version of the WEB LCT application present on the equipment. Options. Displays and manages the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page. Login. Manages the login and the logout of the user.
(5)
Label: On Line (green). The equipment is in connected status. In this condition, the parameters can be verified/modified. Off Line (red). The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters cannot be verified/modified. The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular intervals (timeout set by the user) until when the equipment returns in connected status or the WEB LCT page is closed.
26
(6)
Box: Urg. Status of the urgent alarms (alarms with Critical or Major severity). The box, according to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours: Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity. Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Not Urg. Status of the not urgent alarms (alarms with Minor or Warning severity). The box, according to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours: Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity. Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity. Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Radio 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A. Depending on the equipment configuration type, the box can take on different colours. In detail in configuration: 1+0. Color box: Green. The radio connection works properly. Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A. Green. The radio connection works properly. Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works correctly). Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not correctly work).
1+1. Color box:
Radio 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A. The parameter is meaningful only for equipment in protected configuration. If the box is of color: Green. The radio connection works properly. Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works correctly). Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 2A does not correctly work). Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop). Grey. No manual forcing is active. Light blue. The firmware update is in progress. Grey. The firmware update is not in progress. Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75C. Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75C and 80C. Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80C. 1+0. Unprotected radio configuration. 1+1 FD. Radio configuration with hetero-frequential protection. 1+1 HS. Radio configuration with iso-frequential protection.
ManOp. Activation status of the manual operations. If the box is of color:
Dwl. Activation status of the update of the equipment firmware. If the box is of color:
x C. Operating temperature of the equipment. If the box is of color:
<radio configuration>. Wording:
The absence of alarms, of manual forcing and of download in progress is pointed out by the grey box. (7) For each branch, a line is foreseen pointing out from left to right in the column: Radio. Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to. Wording: Tx.... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to transmission. Rx... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to reception.
27
The boxes Tx2A and Rx2A are present and meaningful only for the equipment in protected configuration. The operating status of the branch, independently if the switch is automatic or manual, is represented by the colour of the box: Green. Working branch. White. Standby branch.
In the equipment in 1+1 hetero-frequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit at the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green. ACM Prof. Current ACM profile. TDM Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1). ETH Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries. Chan - Freq. RF channel expressed as channel number (Chan) and relevant frequency (Freq). The wording UNAVAIL. points out that the RF channel is not set. Power. Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx). In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in the line Tx relevant to the standby branch. Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application

1. Select the About tab (see Fig.6). The About tab opens. The Version parameter points out the version of the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the equipment controller.
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page
1. Select the Options tab (see Fig.6). The Change Options tab opens. The Event polling interval parameter points out the time interval (timeout) between two successive updates of the information present in the WEB LCT page. 2. To modify the parameter, set a number between 5 and 30 seconds. 3. Press Ok.
To execute the login of the user

1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6). The Change Login tab opens. 2. Type the name of the user, with which you wish to execute the login, in the User box. 3. Type the access code associated to the set use into the Password box. 4. Press Login. If the operation is successful, the profile of the user who has executed the operation is pointed out in the Curr. Profile box (Read and Write, Station Operator or System).
28
If the system displays the following message: Login Fail. Problem: Invalid User!, it means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the users list of the local equipment or that the user password is wrong. Login Fail. The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user, it means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation. Problem: To many WEB users! it means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.14).
To execute the logout of the user

1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6). The Change Login tab opens. 2. Press Logout. If the operation is successful, the wording Monitor is displayed in the Curr. Profile box.
29
CONTEXTUAL AREA
The contextual area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed. Its content changes accordingly to the selected command. In WEB LCT the commands allowing to verify/modify the equipment parameters are collected in the following menus: Main Menu (pag.35). Commands for the management of the general equipment parameters as, for example, the configuration of the supervision ports, the Routing Table, the remote equipment table, the measure of Performance Monitoring, etc. The commands of the Main Menu are displayed in the contextual area at the opening of the WEB LCT page or each time you select the command Go to Main or Equipment Menu > Main Menu as depicted in Fig.7. Equipment Menu (pag.148). Commands for the management of the configuration parameters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to. The command of the Equipment Menu are displayed in a pop-up area that opens when the mouse pointer passes over the Equipment Menu as depicted in Fig.8.
When a command is selected in the Main Menu or in the Equipment Menu, the contextual area displays all the parameters relevant to the selected command. Fig.9 displays an example. For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. If all the tabs are not displayed at the same time, the arrows keys are displayed to scroll the tabs. In detail, use the keys to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs.
The contextual area can moreover display the following messages: WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to the user with profile System. You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout. For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are automatically deactivated (see pag.129). The wording No Timeout points out that the timeout is disabled; this means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. Requesting Data. Please wait!, Sending Data. Please wait!. The request or the sending of data is respectively in progress between the PC and the equipment. Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned! A not allowed value has been set. Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action or is not logged to the equipment yet. Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.
30
Fig.7 Main Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
Fig.8 Equipment Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
31
Fig.9 Contextual area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.9 notes (1) (2) Select the Help command to display the help on-line. Select the Go to Main command to display in the contextual area the commands of the Main Menu (pag.35). Press Refresh to force the reading of the data from equipment. If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active. (4) Press Apply to make the set changes operative. Generally, on the selection of the push-button, a confirmation window is displayed. Some confirmation windows are timed (for example, the confirmation windows of the manual operations). When this period (pointed out by the clock) is elapsed, if the operator has not confirmed the operation, the window is closed and the operation cancelled. If the Apply push-button is not available: It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or the equipment is in connected/monitor status. No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed. Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation or the change of the parameters.
(3)
32
EVENTS LIST AREA

The Events List area displays the list of the status and alarm signals stored in the equipment controller as depicted in Fig.10. By means of the items present in the area, it is possible: To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of alarm/status signals (pag.34). To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to file (pag.102). To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.105). While, by means of the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command, it is possible:
For more information about the status/alarm signals, refer to pag.34.
Fig.10 Events list area (WEB LCT page)
Fig.10 notes (1) To each signal a record is associated, where the following information is reported: <Coloured box>. Box: Green. Status signal. Light blue. Alarm detected with Warning severity. Yellow. Alarm detected with Minor severity. Orange. Alarm detected with Major severity. Red. Alarm detected with Critical severity. Grey. Alarm detected/cleared.
Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
When the mouse passes over a signal, a window is displayed where the following information is reported: Signal type: Status. Status signal. Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity. Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity. Major. Alarm detected with Major severity. Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity. Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
Logic group which the signal belongs to: LIM, RT, COMMON, etc. Date/time of the signal detection (field In:). Date/time of the signal clearing (field Out:). This field is present only for the detected/cleared alarms (signals of type Cleared).
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of the date/ time is the following: month/day/year hour:minutes:seconds.
33
(2)
Wording: Filter is Off. No filter is active. Filter is On. At least one filter is active.
(3)
The information present in the list are updated at regular intervals. The period between an update and the successive one is pointed out by the clock. If you want to update the information immediately without waiting for the refresh period select the Reload command.
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals

1. In the Events list area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) if present the wording: Filter is Off. No filter is active for the status/alarm signals displayed in the area. Filter is On. At least one filter is active for the status/alarm signals.
2. To verify the status of the filters, select the Filter is... command. A tab opens where the following filters are displayed: Box: . Filter active. For example, if the Status box is active the status signals will not be present in the list. . Filter inactive. Status. Status signal. Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity. Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity. Major. Alarm detected with Major severity. Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity. Cleared. Alarm detected and cleared.
3. To modify the filters, activate/deactivate the specific boxes. 4. Select . Each time a filter is applied, not only the currently displayed records are considered, but even all the records stored in the equipment controller. The setting of the filters remains valid until it is not modified by the user or the WEB LCT is closed.
Alarm and status signals (more info)

The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any component that composes it. The term status identifies instead the signals referring to any event that does not points out a malfunction but a status change, an operation in progress or an operating indication. A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new event will overwrite the oldest event. The term event defines each single signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
34
MAIN MENU
In the Main Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present: Equipment Properties (pag.36). It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and executes the equipment software reset. Port Configuration (pag.38). It manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment. Routing Table (pag.44). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway). Stored Routing Table (pag.48). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway). Remote Element Table, (pag.51). It manages the remote equipment list. Performance Monitoring (pag.56). It manages the Performance Monitoring measures. Reports & Loggers Maintenance (pag.102). It saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/alarm signals and the operations executed by the users. SNTP & Wake Up Configuration (pag.106). It manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap. SD Memory Management (pag.111). It manages the memory card SD for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software. Software info & Maintenance (pag.119). It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment and the communication stack used by the equipment. Backup/Restore Configuration (pag.125). It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration. Unit List (pag.127). It manages the hardware constituting the equipment. Active Manual Operation (pag.129). It manages the manual operations. Alarm Severity Configuration (pag.131). It manages the alarm transmission and their severity level. View Logged User (pag.134). It manages the users connected to the equipment. User Manager (pag.136). It manages the list of the equipment users. Features Management (pag.141). It manages the functionalities enabled for the equipment. RMON (pag.143). It manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
For each command, the relevant description points out the user profile necessary to be able to use it. In detail, the wording: Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status. Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
35
EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES
Curr. Profile
Reading Reading/Writing
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator*, System
* The Station Operator user cannot align the reference date/time of the equipment to the date/time of the PC. The Equipment Properties command manages the properties and executes the equipment software reset. In detail, it is possible: To verify the equipment properties (pag.36). To modify the equipment identifier (pag.37) To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment (pag.37). To execute the equipment software reset (pag.37). To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC (pag.37).
To verify the equipment properties

1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command. The Equipment Properties contextual area opens, where the equipment properties are displayed (see Fig.11). Fig.11 Equipment Properties contextual area
Fig.11 notes (1) Box: Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment. Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network of the equipment. MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
36
Ethernet/OSI Address Relation. IP Address of the inner port for the interfacing with the OSI router (IP Address) and the NSAP address (Gosip) of the equipment. The parameters are meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network.
(2)
Date, time format: month/day/year, hour: minutes: seconds.
To modify the equipment identifier

1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command. The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11). 2. Into the Equipment ID box, type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm. The new value is pointed out into the ID field of the WEB LCT page.
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment

1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command. The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11). 2. Into the Agent IP Address box, type, for each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To execute the equipment software reset

After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones. 1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command. The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11). 2. Press Restart. The message Are you sure to restart the equipment? is displayed. 3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
The operation could cause the logout of the user. 1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command. The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11). 2. Press Align. Equip. Date/Time with PC Date/Time and confirm. The value, present into the Equip. Date/Time box, is updated with the one present into the PC Date/ Time box.
37
PORT CONFIGURATION
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator, System
The Port Configuration command manages the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment. In detail, it is possible: To verify/modify the characteristics of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment (pag.38). To execute the equipment software reset (pag.43).
To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Port Configuration command. The Port Configuration contextual area opens, where the communication ports of the equipment are displayed (see Fig.12). 2. To verify the parameters relevant to a port, bring at front the specific tab. 3. To modify the parameters of the: Ethernet port (pag.39) LCT PPP port (pag.40) Radio 1A port (pag.40) 2Mb/s EOC port (pag.41) IP Over OSI port (pag.42)
4. Press Apply and confirm. 5. Press Store and confirm. 6. Press Restart and confirm. Fig.12 Port Configuration contextual area
38
Fig.12 notes (1) For the ALCplus2 IDU equipment are available the following tabs: Ethernet. Communication port with the LAN network. LCT PPP. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT. Radio 1A. 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame. 2Mb/s EOC. Communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal. IP Over OSI. Inner port for the interfacing with the OSI router.
Depending on the type of protocol managed by the selected equipment (IP/OSI), only the tabs relevant to the communication ports managed by this protocol will be available. (2) Push-button: Restart. It executes the software reset of the equipment. Store. It stores the values into the equipment controller. Retrieve. It reads again the values set into the equipment controller.
Ethernet port
Parameter/area: IP Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field. IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. MNGT/x Alarm Sev. Enabling/severity status of the alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable (MNGT/x Cable Fail) relevant to the Ethernet LAN port: Disable. Disabled alarm. Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal. Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively: Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list. MNGT/x Cable Cross. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the specific Ethernet LAN port: mdi. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality). mdi-x. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality). auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list. In band management. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the supervision is achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries). In detail, if the LAN x box: . The in band supervision on the specific LAN is not active. . The in band supervision on the specific LAN is active.
To modify the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes. A VLan for this management can be reserved only when the in band supervision is active (at least one LAN x box active). In detail, if the value present in the VLan ID box is: 0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision. Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.
The x value points out the number of the Ethernet LAN port.
39
LCT PPP port

Parameter/push-button/area: IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/ LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP PPP NetMask field. IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user. PC IP Address. IP address of the remote equipment: Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned to the remote equipment. For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address 10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment. Eth Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP address valid for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to the remote equipment. For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned to the port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment. It is suggested to use this setting if you wish to use only one IP address, within the IP subnetwork, for the connection to the PC. If the equipment is managed with protocol: IP, the value Eth Broadcast Ip Address -1 is present. OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The address set by the user in the fields xxx is assigned to the remote equipment.
In order to modify the parameter, select the wished option and, only for the last option, type the wished IP. The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the connection is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote equipment (see parameter PC IP Address).
Radio 1A port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol and if the in band supervision is disable (see Ethernet port - pag.39). Parameter/push-button: IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP PPP NetMask field. IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP
40
address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user. PPP Mode. Operating mode: Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps active the connection to the remote equipment. Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the remote equipment sets up the connection. Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
To change the parameter selects the wished option.
2Mb/s EOC port

Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol. Parameter/push-button/area: IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP PPP NetMask field. IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the user. PPP Mode. PPP operating mode: Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps active the connection to the remote equipment. Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the remote equipment sets up the connection.
To change the parameter selects the wished option. Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination: Not used. No interface. E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
To change the parameter select the wished option. EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal. In detail, parameter: 2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that the system does not use any tributary. To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list. If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the T12 synchronism (see Fig.51). Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31). 16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of white color are not used. To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (white color) and vice-versa. The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
41
IP Over OSI port

Port available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
IP Over OSI tab Parameter/area: IP Address. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant IP NetMask field. IP NetMask. Mask for the inner network address definition. To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. EOC Radio Side 1A. Usage modality of the Radio channel: Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side. User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side. Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the value from the list. Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination: Not used. No interface. E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
To change the parameter select the wished option. EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal. In detail, parameter: 2Mbit/s Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that the system does not use any tributary. To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list. If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the T12 synchronism (see Fig.51). Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot. To change the parameter selects the box and then the value from the list. 16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of grey color are not used.
To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (grey color) and vice-versa. The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area. EOC 2Mbit Side. Usage modality of the EOC E1 channel: Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side. User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the value from the list. The EOC 2Mbit Side area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
NSap tab Area: Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address. The IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel parameters cannot be changed. To change the parameter: System ID, type the wished value into the relevant boxes.
42
Press Set as MAC to set as physical address the System ID value. AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. Domain, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain. Area, type the values of the bytes that represent the area. L1. Intra domain (inside the domain/area) L2. Extra domain (outside the domain/area).
Routing. Routing level of the OSI router:
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones. 1. Select the Main Menu > Port Configuration command. The Port Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.12). 2. Press Restart. The message Are you sure to restart? is displayed. 3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
43
ROUTING TABLE
Curr. Profile
The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway). In detail, it is possible: To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment (Running Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.44) To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.45) To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table (pag.45) To set/modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.46) To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.46)
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.46.
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command. The Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the address of the Default Gateway currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.13). Fig.13 Routing Table contextual area
Fig.13 notes (1) Wording: Lan. Communication port with the LAN network. Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
44
Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT. Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal. 2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port. <no wording>. Inner port (internal loopback).
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI), The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main Menu > Port Configuration (pag.38) command. (2) Wording: Local. The element has been automatically inserted by the controller. The element identifies the network and/or the interface directly connected with the equipment. NetMgmt. The element has been manually inserted by the user (static element). Ospf. The element has been automatically inserted by the OSPF protocol (dynamic element). Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases (this label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
To add an element to the Routing Table

1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command. The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.13). 2. Select the Add tab. The Add New Route Item tab opens. 3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the network address definition of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the next router equipment. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. Press Add and confirm. The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table

1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command. The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.13). 2. Select the element of the Routing Table. Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted. 3. Select the Remove tab. The Remove Item tab opens. 4. Press Remove Selected Item(s) and confirm. The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
45
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway

1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command. The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.13). 2. Select the Default Gateway tab. The Default Gateway tab opens. 3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to. 4. Press Apply and confirm. The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway

1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command. The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.13). 2. Select the Default Gateway tab. The Default Gateway tab opens. 3. Press Remove and confirm. The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)

When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic. The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.
Routing Table The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other one.
Routing Table (Running) Each equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Table that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment for the input/output of the supervisory signal). These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port. If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
46
If it is necessary, the WEB LCT user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones. The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they are newly set at every equipment start-up. The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface. The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an address of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.
47
STORED ROUTING TABLE
Curr. Profile
System
The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway). In detail, it is possible: To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.48). To add elements to the Stored Routing Table (pag.49). To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table (pag.50). To set or to change the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table (pag.50). To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table (pag.50).
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.46.
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command. The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.14). Fig.14 Stored Routing Table contextual area
48
Fig.14 notes (1) Wording: Lan. Communication port with the LAN network. Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI. Lct. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT. Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal. 2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI), The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main Menu > Port Configuration (pag.38) command. (2) Push-button: Retrieve. It reads again the data from the backup memory and loads them into the equipment memory. Save. It saves the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment. Refresh. It reads again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve command. For instance, if the user wants updating the stored Routing Table displaying the elements manually added by the user into the running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and later the Refresh one.
To add an element into the Stored Routing Table

1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command. The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14). 2. Select the Add tab. The Add New Route Item tab opens. 3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the network address definition of the destination element (equipment, network, etc.). For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the next router equipment. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. 6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port that corresponds to the IP address of the router equipment. Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the wished option from the list (see Fig.14). Select the wording None selected, when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according to the IP address of the router. 7. Press Add and confirm. The system inserts the new element into the table. 8. Press Save and confirm. The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment. The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current routing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
49
To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table

1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command. The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14). 2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table. Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted. 3. Select the Remove tab. The Remove Item tab opens. 4. Press Remove Selected Item(s) and confirm. 5. Press Save and confirm. The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment. The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current Routing Table (Running Routing Table).
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command. The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14). 2. Select the Default Gateway tab. The Default Gateway tab opens. 3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway. For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between 0 and 255. The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway equipment corresponds to. 4. Press Apply and confirm. 5. Press Save and confirm. The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment. The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart procedure of the equipment itself and the system will insert it also into the current Routing Table (Running Routing Table).
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command. The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14). 2. Select the Default Gateway tab. The Default Gateway tab opens. 3. Press Remove and confirm. 4. Press Save and confirm. The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.
50
REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE
Curr. Profile
The Remote Element Table command manages the remote equipment list. In detail, it is possible: To verify the remote equipment list (pag.51). To add (pag.52), to rename (pag.52) and to remove (pag.53) a station. To add (pag.53) and to remove (pag.54) an equipment inside the list. To reset the remote equipment list (pag.54)
For more information about the remote equipment list (Remote Element Table) go to pag.54.
To verify the remote equipment list

1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens, where the remote equipment list is displayed (see Fig.15). Fig.15 Remote Element Manager contextual area
Fig.15 notes (1) For each station, the name of the station is displayed after the suffix Station: The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself. The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the remote equipment list. An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the remote equipment list. To expand a station and see the list of the associated equipment, it is sufficient to select the record of the station.
51
(2)
The name of the equipment in the remote equipment list is automatically assigned by the application during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>. Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
(3)
Wording: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT). Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.
To add a station to the list

It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list. 1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Press Add (Station Menu). The Enter new station name window opens. 3. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). The program does nor create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of a number or of a space as first character is not allowed. 4. Press Ok. The application displays the new station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area, at the end of the list relevant to the already existing stations. 5. Press Apply and confirm. An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
To rename a station of the list

1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Select the station to be renamed. 3. Press Rename (Station Menu). The Rename Station window opens. 4. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 characters). The program does nor create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of a number or of a space as first character is not allowed. 5. Press Ok. The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
52
To remove a station of the list

The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all the equipment coupled with such a station. 1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Select the station to be removed. 3. Press Remove (Station Menu). The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To add an equipment to the list

It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment. An equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before. 1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled. If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the last selected station. 3. Press Add (Equipment Menu). The Add New Element window opens. 4. Into the text box, type the IP address of the equipment. The program does not create two equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even if in different stations). 5. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP (Gosip) address executing the following procedure: a. Into the Sys.ID field (Gosip Address area), type the wished value. b. To check or to change the setting of the default part of the address, press Set. The Gosip Address area is expanded. The IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel parameters cannot be changed. c. To change the parameter: AFI, choose the arrow and select the desired value from the list. Domain, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain. Area, type the values of the bytes that represent the area.
d. Press Set. 6. Select the option relevant to the element type to be inserted: Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT). Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides). Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI network.
7. Press OK.
53
In the Remote Element Table contextual area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment. 8. Press Apply and confirm.
To remove an equipment from the list

1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Select the equipment to be removed. 3. Press Remove (Equipment Menu). The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To reset the remote equipment list

1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command. The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.15). 2. Press Clear List. The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote Element Manager contextual area. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
Remote equipment list (more info)

Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller. For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning; it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment. Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station. The remote equipment list has a specific function according to the management program in use.
WEB LCT application When the user requires the opening from browser of the WEB LCT application of an equipment (local equipment), at the opening, besides the WEB LCT page of this equipment, the system automatically opens even the WEB LCT page of the equipment, of Remote Link type, present in the remote equipment list of the local equipment. If the remote equipment does not answer to the connection request, the connection command will be sent cyclically until when: The WEB LCT page of the local equipment is closed. The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY to insert in the remote equipment list of the local equipment: The local equipment with type Managed by SCT. The remote equipment with type Remote Link.
54
SCT/LMT program When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment), at the connection of such an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and automatically forwards the connection command to all the equipment present into the list. In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT graphical interface, all the stations that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection request of the application will result in connected/monitor status. The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered to the connection request, until to: It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment. The user disables the equipment. The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More detailed information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.
55
PERFORMANCE MONITORING
Curr. Profile
The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status of the PM measures (pag.61). To activate a PM measure (pag.62). To activate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.62). To deactivate a PM measure (pag.62). To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.63). To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.63). To reset the values of the control parameters, to execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms, to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms for the measure: G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.64) G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.69) G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74) G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78) G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82) G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.84) ACM Radio A (pag.89) RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95) TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98)
For more information about the: PM measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment go to pag.57 Quality parameters description go to pag.58 PM measures in general go to pag.101
56
Measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment

The measures available for the ALCplu2 IDU equipment are the following. G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.64). This measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. he SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.69). This measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters: Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP. Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE. Byte B2 e M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74). This measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at line side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.84). This measure checks the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream. The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE, BBE, BBE FE quality parameters. The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. ACM Radio A (pag.89). This measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time. The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and DownShift). RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95). This measure checks the power of the signal at reception. The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI. TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98). This measure checks the power of the signal at transmission. The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.
57
Quality parameters description (PM measures)
G829 RstB1 STM-1... measure The quality parameters description of the G829 RstB1 STM-1... measure (pag.64) is the following: BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES. ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks. SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.). SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES. UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. OOFS (Out of Frame Seconds). The second that do not belong to UAS but with the Out OF Frame Alarm activated.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1... measure The quality parameters description of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1... measure (pag.69) is the following: BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES. ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks. SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.). SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES. UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES. ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote blocks. SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm). SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE. UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
58
G828 Radio..., G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Radio Side measures The quality parameters description of the G828 Radio... (pag.74), G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78) and G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82) measure is the following: BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES. ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks. SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.). SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES. UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
G828 STM-1... - Vc12... measure The quality parameters description of the G828 STM-1... - Vc12... measure (pag.84) is the following: BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one errored bit not belonging to SES. ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks. SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.). SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES. UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES. ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote blocks. SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm). SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE. UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured. UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) unavailability seconds.
ACM Radio A measure The quality parameters description of the ACM Radio A measure (pag.89) is the following: 4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *.
59
8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 32QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 32QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 64QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 64QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 128QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 128QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. 256QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 256QAM. The rule used to increase the counter changes according to the active increase mode *. DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one. UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes: Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to the one currently active. Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is: Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased. Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be selected by the user.
RxPwr Radio... measure The quality parameters description of the RxPwr Radio... measure (pag.95) is the following: TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
TxPwr Radio... measure The quality parameters description of the TxPwr Radio... measure (pag.98) is the following: TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours). Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period (15 min or 24 hours) Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.
60
To verify the status of the PM measures

1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens, where the status of the PM measures is displayed (see Fig.16). The ALCplus2 IDU equipment support the following measures: G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.64) G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.69) G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74) G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78) G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82) G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.84) ACM Radio A (pag.89) RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95) TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98) Fig.16 Performance Monitoring contextual area
Fig.16 notes (1) The measures are subdivided in groups. Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded. The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed. The group and the relevant measures available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment are the following: G828 group, measure: G828 Radio..., checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. G828 E1 Line Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at line side. G828 E1 Radio Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side. RxPwr Radio..., checks the power of the signal at reception.
RxPwr group, measure:
61
TxPwr group, measure: TxPwr Radio..., checks the power of the signal at transmission. ACM Radio A, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time. G829 RstB1 STM-1..., checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1 stream). G829 MstB2M1 STM-1..., checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM1 stream). G828 STM-1... - Vc12..., checks the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream. ACM group, measure: G829 RstB1 group, measure:
G829 MstB2M1 group, measure:
G828 Vc12 group, measure:
(2)
Wording: Stopped. The measure is not on progress. Running. The measure is on progress.
To activate a PM measure
1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Execute one of the following operations: Press Start at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm. The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running. Press Show at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated. The Performance... window opens. Press Start and confirm. The measure is started-up.
To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously

1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group. 3. Press Start Current and confirm. The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.
To deactivate a PM measure
1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure.
62
3. Execute one of the following operations: Press Stop at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm. The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped. Press Show at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated. The Performances window opens. Press Stop and confirm. The measure is stopped.
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously

1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group. 3. Press Stop Current and confirm. The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms
1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens, where the results of the measures and the status of the alarms relevant to the exceeding of the threshold limits are displayed. The commands present into window allows executing the following operations: To reset the values of the control parameters. To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms. To activate/deactivate the measure. To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms.
The description of the Performance... window, of the control parameters and of the procedures to execute the above mentioned operations are contained in the paragraph relevant to each specific measure. In detail: G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.64) G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.69) G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.74) G828 E1 Line Side (pag.78) G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.82) G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.84) ACM Radio A (pag.89) RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.95) TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.98)
63
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure

Measure available and meaningful only when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS quality parameters (see pag.58). The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.17). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.67). Fig.17 Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window
64
Fig.17 notes (1) Command: Label: (2) Seconds. Into the table there are the arameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit. Refresh. It updates the data. Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary). Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the measure, the second one reactivates it. Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT. Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
Each column represents a daily or primary record. In detail, the column: Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours). Last Day. Preceding daily record. Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes). 15m... 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS (see pag.58). Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
Each box represents an alarm. Box: 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window. 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window. UAS. Unavailability alarm. Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity. Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level. Grey. Alarm deactivated.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
65
To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens. 4. Select the Clear Counters command and confirm. The values displayed into table are reset.
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS. 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens. 4. Select the Clear Alarms command and confirm. All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms.
To activate a measure 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens. 4. Select the Start command and confirm. The measure is started-up.
To deactivate a measure 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens. 4. Select the Stop command and confirm. The measure is stopped.
To change the type of the displayed control parameters (G828..., G829...) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16).
66
2. Select the group that contains the measure. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828... or G829... measure. The Performance <measure name> window opens. 4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list: Seconds, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: ES, etc. Blocks, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the blocks: BBE.
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (G829 RstB1 STM-1) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G829 RstB1 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure. The Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters: General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters: N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%). Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option.
15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:
15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:
24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:
67
24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:
24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:
UAS. Severity of the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter select the wished option.
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window. 5. Press Apply and confirm.
68
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure

Measure available and meaningful only when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parameters (for the description see pag.58): Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP. Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE. Byte B2 e M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.18). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.71). Fig.18 Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window
69
Fig.18 notes (1) Command: Label: (2) Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit. Refresh. It updates the data. Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary). Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the measure, the second one reactivates it. Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT. Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.58). Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
70
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (G829 MstB2M1 STM-1) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G829 MstB2M1 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure. The Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters: General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters: N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%). Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M E. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
71
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. 15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
72
UAS FE. Severity of the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter select the wished option. UAS Bidi. Severity of the UAS BIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter select the wished option.
73
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure

The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration. The G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see pag.58). The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.19). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.76).
Fig.19 Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window
74
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58). Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
75
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (G828 Radio) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G828 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 Radio <radio branch> measure. The Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters: General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters: N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%). Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
76
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. 24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
77
G828 E1 Line Side measure

In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec. The G828 E1 Line Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at line side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see pag.58). The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Line Side window (see Fig.20). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.80). To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.81).
Fig.20 Performance G828 E1 Line Side window
78
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58) Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
(6)
The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.
79
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (G828 E1...) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G828 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure. The Performance G828 E1... window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters: General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters: N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%). Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
80
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. 24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure The operation is not available when the system uses as supervisory port (EOC) an equipment tributary (refer to pag.41). In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measures, the same tributary used for the supervisory operations. The change of the tributary for the G828 E1 Line Side measure automatically changes the value of the tributary for the G828 E1 Radio Side measure and vice versa. 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G828 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure. The Performance G828 E1... window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens. 5. Select the 2Mb Selection option The 2Mb Selector parameter opens, which points out the 2Mbit/s used for the calculation oft he measure control parameters. In detail, the selected value: Trib A, the tributary A is used for the measure. Trib B, the tributary B is used for the measure. No 2Mb Used, no tributary is set for the measure.
To change the parameter, select the wished value from the list (Trib A or Trib B). If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the T12 synchronism (see Fig.51). Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
81
G828 E1 Radio Side measure

In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec. The G828 E1 Radio Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side. The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see pag.58). The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window (seen Fig.21). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.80). To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.81).
Fig.21 Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window
82
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.58) Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
(6)
The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.
83
G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure

Measure available and meaningful only when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure checks the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream. The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE, BBE, BBE FE quality parameters (see pag.58). The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec. In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window (see Fig.22). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.86).
Fig.22 Performance G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window
84
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.58). Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
85
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (G828 STM-1... - Vc12...) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the G828 Vc12 group. 3. Press Show at the side of the G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure. The G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters: General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters: N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds without SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10). N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over which it is declared a SES. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%). Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
86
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. 15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
87
UAS FE. Severity of the UAS FE alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter select the wished option. UAS Bidi. Severity of the UAS BIDI alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter select the wished option.
88
ACM Radio A measure

Measure meaningful only when the adaptive modulation is active. The ACM Radio A measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time. The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters: UpShift and DownShift (see pag.58). In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance ACM Radio A window (see Fig.23). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed counters (pag.66). To set the thresholds of the alarms (pag.80). To modify the modality used to increase the counters (pag.94).
Fig.23 Performance ACM Radio A window
89
Fig.23 notes (1) Command: Label: (2) Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table. UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table. Refresh. It updates the data. Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary). Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the measure, the second one reactivates it. Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT. Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
The Type column, points out the counters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (3). (3) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(4)
One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM (see pag.58). For every counter, the column of the specific observation period points out (expressed in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. The rule used to increased a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see note 6). Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen: DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one. UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.
The table does not display all the counters at the same time (see note 1).
90
(5)
Each box represents an alarm. Box: 15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window. 24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window. Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity. Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level. Grey. Alarm deactivated.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity: (6)
If the active modality is: Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to the one currently active. Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is: Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased. Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
To change the type of the displayed counters 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the ACM group. 3. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio A measure. The Performance ACM Radio A window opens. 4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list: Seconds, to display the results of the counters: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, etc. UpDownShift to display the results of the counters: DownShift and UpShift.
To set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio A) 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the ACM group. 3. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio A measure. The Performance ACM Radio A window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant counters: 15M 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM Strong alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
91
15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 64QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 15M 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
15M 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 15M 8PSK alarm:
15M 16QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 16QAM alarm:
92
24H 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAMS alarm: Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 32QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 32QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 64QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. 24H 128QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 128QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option.
24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM alarm:
24H 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 24H 8PSK alarm:
93
24H 256QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the counter 256QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm. To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
To modify the modality used to increase the counters 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the ACM group. 3. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio A measure. The Performance ACM Radio A window opens. 4. Press Change. The Policy window opens. 5. Select the option: Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active one, are increased. Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are increased.
6. Press Apply and confirm.
94
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure

The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration. The RxPwr Radio measure checks the power of the signal at reception. The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI (see pag.58). In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window shown (see Fig.24). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.97). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.97).
Fig.24 Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window
95
Fig.24 notes (1) Command: Label: (2) Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit. Refresh. It updates the data. Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary). Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the measure, the second one reactivates it. Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT. Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the records - see note (4). (3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Rlts (see pag.58) Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dbm. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
Each box represents an alarm. Box: 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window. 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window. Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity. Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level. Grey. Alarm deactivated.
Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the user.
96
To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the RxPwr group. 3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens. 4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list: Rlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Rlts1, etc. TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level.
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the RxPwr group. 3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window: 15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Rlts... alarms: Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt 4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power. To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value comprised between -100dBm and 20dBm. Default: Rlt 1: -40dBm, Rlt 2: -50dBm, Rlt 3: -60dBm, Rlt 4: -70dBm, Rlt 5: 55dBm.
24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Rlts... alarms:
Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm. In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch are not automatically reported even on the other branches. Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window. 5. Press Apply and confirm.
97
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure

The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration. The TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission. The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI (see pag.58). In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.16) the selection of the Show push-button, at the side of the measure, opens the Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.25). With the commands present into the window, it is possible: To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.66). To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.66). To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.66). To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.100). To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms (pag.100).
Fig.25 Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window
98
Fig.25 notes (1) Command: Label: (2) Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit. TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit. Refresh. It updates the data. Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary). Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the measure, the second one reactivates it. Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT. Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column. What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the status of the record - see note (4). (3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Tlts (see pag.58). Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm. (4) Wording: Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by errors. Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters have not exceeded their threshold value. Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding observation period. The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status. The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily records are acquired at 23.59 of each day. Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles. Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE. When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status. ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under examination, the measure was not activated.
(5)
Each box represents an alarm. Box: 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window. 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window. Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity. Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level. Grey. Alarm deactivated.
Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the user.
99
To change the type of the displayed control parameters 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the TxPwr group. 3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens. 4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list: Tlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Tlts1, etc. TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin.
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms 1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command. The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.16). 2. Select the TxPwr group. 3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure. The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens. 4. Select the Commons command. The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window: 15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Tlts... alarms: Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms. To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm. To reset the value press Reset and confirm. Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major). To change the parameter selects the wished option. Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt 4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power. To change a threshold move the cursor over a value comprised between -25dBm and 30dBm. Default: Tlt 1: 13dBm, Tlt 2: 15dBm, Tlt 3: 17dBm, Tlt 4: 19dBm.
24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Tlts... alarms:
Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm. In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch are not automatically reported even on the other branches. Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window. 5. Press Apply and confirm.
100
PM measures (more info)

A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of specific parameters. Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can be changed). The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condition generates an alarm. The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the threshold limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms. The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommendations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period). If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure. The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated). For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time 11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have as observation period 11.40...00.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records relevant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment. For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day). The preceding records are overwritten. When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure. For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be stored. If an equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will successively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically restarted. The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the preceding records.
101
REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE
Curr. Profile
Monitor Read Only*, Read and Write*, Station Operator*, System
* The Read Only, Read and Write and Station Operator user CANNOT delete the signals and the list of operations. The Reports & Loggers Maintenance command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/ alarm signals and the operations executed by the users. In detail, it is possible: To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to file (pag.102) To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.105). To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller (pag.105).
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to file
In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active. 1. Select the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command. The Report Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.26). 2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file: Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list, user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc. Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history). Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users, stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created containing the relevant data. 3. Press Generate Report. In sequence, are displayed: The WEB Report page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the activated options, are pointed out. Fig.27 shows an example of content of the WEB page. A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use. 4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file. The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.
102
Fig.26 Report Manager contextual area
Fig.26 notes (1) The option: Inventory report, allows saving the whole equipment configuration to file: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list, user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc. Fault report, allows saving to file the list of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history). Command Log, allows saving to file the list of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/ LMT or NMS5UX users, stored in the equipment controller.
One or more options can be selected. Depending on the activated options, a file containing the relevant data will be saved.
103
Fig.27 Report (WEB page)
Fig.27 notes (1) The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters present in each group is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data. To each operation, it is devoted a record that points out the following information: Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. Source address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been executed the operation. User. Name of the user who has executed the operation. Object. Object to which the operation refers. Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers. Value Set. Set value.
(2)
The presence of the symbol "" points out that the information is not available because it is a not significant one for the type of operation to which it refers. (3) To each signal, it is devoted a record that points out the following information: Severity. This field points out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal or if the signal has been detected or it has been reset. If the situation concerns an alarm, it is pointed out also its severity level. Wording Disable Status Warning Description Alarm signal reset Status signal Alarm detected with Warning severity
104
Wording Minor Major Critical
Description Alarm detected with Minor severity Alarm detected with Major severity Alarm detected with Critical severity
Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal. Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If: The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm. The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller

1. Select the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command. The Report Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.26). 2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller

1. Select the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command. The Report Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.26). 2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
105
SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION
Curr. Profile
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/ time of the equipment from a network element (Server NTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality). In detail, it is possible: To verify the SNTP functionality status (pag.106) To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality (pag.107) To disable the SNTP functionality (pag.107) To verify the Wake Up functionality status (pag.108) To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality (pag.108) To disable the Wake Up functionality (pag.109)
For more information about the: Server NTP functionality go to pag.109 Wake Up functionality go to pag.110
To verify the SNTP functionality

1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active. The tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant execution parameters (see Fig.28). Fig.28 SNTP tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Fig.28 notes (1) In detail, the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment is: Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP Address and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.
106
Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
(2)
The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm points out that none of the set network elements is reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is not aligned. The colour of the box points out the status of the alarm: Green. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality

The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Address, etc.) can be modified even when the SNTP functionality is already active. 1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.28). 2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time. 3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Address box. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the Polling Interval box. Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds. 5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout box. Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds. 6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main or secondary element in the Polling Retries box. Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10. 7. Press Apply and confirm.
To disable the SNTP functionality

1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.28). 2. Press Reset next to the Main Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0). 3. Press Reset next to the Reverse Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
107
To verify the Wake Up functionality status

1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens. 2. Select the Wake Up tab. The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending parameters (see Fig.29). Fig.29 Wake Up tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Fig.29 notes (1) The sending of the Wake Up trap is: Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address). Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
(2)
With server we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed. The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it. The user can insert the physical location (for example the name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX does not use this information.
(3)
(4)
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality

The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary to deactivate the Wake Up functionality (see pag.109) and them modify them. 1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens.
108
2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.29). 3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 4. Only if the equipment and the server are inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip Address area). To change the parameter: System ID, type the wished value in the relevant boxes. AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list. Domain, type the values of the bytes that represent the domain. Area, type the values of the bytes that represent the area.
The IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel parameters cannot be changed. 5. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled, in the Timeout box. Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes. The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it. 6. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box. The setting of the parameter is optional. 7. Select the Enable option. 8. Press Apply and confirm.
To disable the Wake Up functionality

1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command. The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens. 2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.29). 3. Select the option Disable or press Reset to reset the NMS IP Address value (value 0.0.0.0). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
Server NTP functionality (more info)

The ALCplus2 IDU equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time using an element within the network as reference (Server NTP functionality). Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set in the Main Server IP Address box - see Fig.28) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Address box) from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Polling Interval box). Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of the functionality. If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box). At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of the date/time to the secondary element. If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/ time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element does not answer the equipment, the system activates the SNTP servers lost Alarm and requires the update of the date/time of the main element and so on.
109
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (see Fig.28). To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address of the main and secondary elements.
Wake Up functionality (more info)

The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap). This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX. The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant documentation. This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. In detail, the implementation of the Wake Up functionality is the following. Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible: To define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must be sent to (option NMS IP Address - see Fig.29) is installed To define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap is automatically disabled (option Timeout). If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it. To activate and deactivate the sending of the trap. To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address) and select the option Enable. To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the option Disable or reset the option NMS IP Address (value 0.0.0.0) pressing Reset (available even when the functionality is active). When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute for the time interval defined by the user (option Timeout). For example, if the value 60 has been set as timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically disabled. If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).
110
SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT
Curr. Profile
The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card) for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory (pag.111). To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit (pag.113). To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory (pag.114) To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory (pag.115)
For more information about the use of the SD memory card in the equipment, go to pag.117.
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory

1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The contextual area SD Management is displayed, showing the status and the configuration of the SD memory present in the equipment (see Fig.30). Fig.30 SD Management contextual area
111
Fig.30 notes (1) Option: Status. SD memory status: SD memory status Loaded Eq Type Mismatch Not formatted Not Present Presence of SD in the equipment Yes Yes Yes No Compatibility (SD data structure - equipment) Yes Yes No Compatibility SD data - equipment type Yes No No -
Type. Type of data present in SD memory: Boot SD. The SD memory contains the equipment configuration parameters and the equipment software. Sw download SD. The SD memory contains only the equipment software. Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).
Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from SD memory: Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is enabled. Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is not enabled. Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD. Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory: Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is enabled. Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is not enabled. Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Not running Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software present in the standby memory bench (status Loaded - see Fig.31) after an automatic sw update from SD memory: Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled. Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled. Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD. EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the data and equipment software present in SD memory. The empty field points out that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.). Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD. EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD memory. The empty field points out that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.). Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD. SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD memory. The empty field points out that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.). (2) Commands available to the user for the management of SD memory. Tab.1 lists the commands. For every command, the use, depending on the data present in the SD memory, and the mean times for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
112
To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit
In case of replacement of the IDU unit of an equipment, it is possible to use the SD memory, where the equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller based on the data present in SD memory. This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change of the IDU unit. Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment restart from SD memory is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD memory: a. Insert the SD memory in the equipment. b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment. c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30). d. Select the Create Boot SD command (Actions area). e. Press Execute and confirm. The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations are executed in this order: Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running). Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).
At the end, press Refresh. If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD. f. In the area Actions, select the command: Enable automatic restore (all), to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software will be pasted from the SD memory to the new controller. Enable automatic restore (Data only), to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the SD memory to the new controller.
g. Press Execute and confirm. If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was: Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled. Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD assumes the value Enabled.
At this point, if the SD memory is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the automatic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved even to the SD memory. If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD memory. Moreover, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all) and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested to execute again this procedure in order to enable again the SD memory to the automatic restart. 2. When the equipment becomes faulted and a replacement of the IDU unit is necessary, remove the SD memory from the faulted equipment and insert the new IDU unit. 3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on. Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are executed:
113
The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller. The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Boot SD. The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of the SD memory) must be equal to that registered in the equipment backpanel. In the descriptor file of the SD memory, the automatic restart from SD memory must be active (parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value Enabled). In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable automatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1f), the configuration data stored in the SD memory must be referred to a equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active in the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful: a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD memory to the controller. b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This operation is executed only if: The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1f The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present in the SD memory.
c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD memory is updated. d. The Serial Number of the controller of the equipment backpanel is updated. e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (bench switch) is forced to restart if even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1f) has been required. f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read from the SD memory. If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory

If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD memory can be used to execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT). Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD memory: a. Insert the SD memory into the equipment where the new sw version is present. b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The SD Management contextual area opens (see Fig.30). d. Select the Create Sw DWL SD command (Actions area). e. Press Execute and confirm. The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations are executed in this order: Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
Once ended, press Refresh.
114
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the parameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD. f. Select the Enable automatic restore (all) command (area Actions) in order to enable the automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory on the equipment restart. g. Press Execute and confirm. If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the value Enabled. h. Select the Enable Not running Sw delete command (area Actions) if you wish that, once the update and the change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in the standby bench (bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted. i. Press Execute and confirm. If the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value Enabled. 2. Remove the SD card from the equipment and insert it into another equipment whose software you wish to update. 3. Switch the IDU unit on. Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed: The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Sw Dwl SD. The automatic update from SD memory must be active in the descriptor file of the SD memory (parameter Enable automatic restore (all)). The sw version stored in the SD memory must be different from both the versions present in the memory benches of the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful: a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded) b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (bench switch) and, then, if set (see step 1h), the sw present in the standby bench is deleted. c. The controller restarts with the updated software. If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory

As help for the management of SD memory, by means of the SD Management window (see Fig.30), the following can be executed. To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory (pag.115) To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) (pag.116) To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD memory (pag.116) To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (pag.116) To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) (pag.116)
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory
This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a single file os not foreseen. 1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.
115
The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30). 2. Select the Delete SD files command (Actions area). 3. Press Execute and confirm. 4. Once ended, press Refresh. If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.
To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory

1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30). 2. Select the Disable automatic restore command (Actions area). 3. Press Execute and confirm. Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Automatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD memory
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present. 1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30). 2. Select the Disable Not running Sw delete command (Actions area). 3. Press Execute and confirm. Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter Not running Sw delete assumes the value Disabled.
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present. 1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.30). 2. Select the Force automatic restore command (Actions area). 3. Press Execute and confirm.
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present. 1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command. The contextual area SD Management is displayed (see Fig.30). 2. Select the Copy Sw from SD command (area Actions). 3. Press Execute and confirm.
116
SD memory card (more info)

ALCplus2 IDU equipment is provided with a SD memory card reader, which allows storing the equipment data on SD (Secure Digital) memory cards.
Storing the equipment data into SD memory The following equipment data can be saved and managed into SD memory: Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software. Saving these data generates a data structure named Boot SD into the SD memory. Equipment software. Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the SD memory. Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD memory. The creation of the structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa. What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2 equipment and relevant management programs (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT). Any other type of data stored in SD memory (user file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD memory, the following file data structure is automatically created: Root Descriptor.txt. Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the SD memory are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD memory (Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD), etc. This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks between the data of the SD memory and the equipment where the SD memory is inserted. Backup Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT) Software
If SD memory is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
Use of the SD memory for the equipment management The SD memory can be used to make the following operations easy and fast. Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD memory and keeping it constantly updated. In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD memory, the controller, after any configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD memory, keeping them constantly updated. When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit and insert it into the new IDU unit. When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the sw present in the SD memory are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the condition before the fault. The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.113.
117
Automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory This operation allows saving, on the SD memory, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the master sw to use for the updating of other equipment. At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU unit and to insert into a different IDU unit. When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present in the SD memory is copied into the controller. The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.114.
Commands for the management/maintenance of SD memory The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD memory are listed in Tab.1. The table points out, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the SD memory and the mean execution times of the operations. Tab.1 Commands for the management of SD memory Command SD memory without data structure SD memory with data structure Boot SD SD memory with data structure Sw Dwl SD Time*
Delete SD files Create BOOT SD Create Sw DWL SD Enable automatic restore (all)
It deletes all the files present in SD memory It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD memory It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD) from the controller to the SD memory It enables the automatic equipment restart from SD memory: when the equipment restarts, both the configuration data and the equipment sw will be copied from the SD memory. It enables the automatic equipment restart from SD memory: when the equipment restarts, only the configuration data will be copied from the SD memory to the new controller It enables the automatic equipment restart from SD memory: when the equipment restarts, the equipment sw will be copied from the SD memory to the controller. -
1/2 min. 5 min. 5 min. 1/2 sec.
Enable automatic restore (Data only)
1/2 sec.
Disable automatic restore Enable Not running Sw delete
It disables the automatic restart of the It disables the automatic update of equipment from SD memory the equipment sw from SD memory It enables the automatic deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench (status Loaded - see Fig.31) after an automatic update of the sw from SD memory It disables the automatic deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic update of the sw from SD memory -
1/2 sec. 1/2 sec.
Disable Not running Sw delete
1/2 sec.
Force automatic restore Copy Sw from SD
It forces the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the equipment sw -
5 min.
It copies the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller
5 min.
* Mean execution time of the operation.
118
SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE
Curr. Profile
Monitor*, Read Only*, Read and Write* Station Operator*, System
* The IP/OSI stack switch card is NOT available to the user Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write and Station Operation. The Software info & Maintenance command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment and the communication stack used by the equipment. In detail, it is possible: To verify the firmware version of the equipment (pag.119). To update the firmware of the equipment (pag.120). To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller (pag.121). To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment (pag.121). To update the WEB LCT application (pag.122). To verify the communication stack in use (pag.122) To modify the communication stack in use (pag.123) To execute the equipment software reset (pag.123)
For more information about the firmware updating go to pag.124.
To verify the firmware version of the equipment

1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active. The tab displays the version of the equipment firmware (see Fig.31). Fig.31 Equip. Firmware tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
119
Fig.31 notes (1) Wording: (2) Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench. Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress (standby). Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench. Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory bench. Interrupted/Aborting. The update of the firmware has been interrupted. Aborting. The update operation has been interrupted.
Column: Unit. Name of the tab or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the programmable device (FPGA file). Software. Firmware name. Usually the name points out the component type. Wording: FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided with a version of the memory benches. FW_appl, Application code. Conf_... or Fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
Actual Rel. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller. For the codes (FW), the system points out the version and also the relevant identification code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different code type).
Rel Bench 1/Rel Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 and 2 of the main controller.
To update the firmware of the equipment

The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (wording Loaded or Not Loaded - see Fig.31). It is not possible to execute such an operation when the updating of the firmware is already on progress (wording Downloading). Then, it is necessary to point out that the firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions. 1. If not already active, run the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage the operation of FTP for the file transfer. 2. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see Fig.31). 3. Select the Download SW Setup tab. The Sw Download tab opens. 4. Set the path where there is the file into the Download file path box. It is possible to type the path and the filename or to select the Browse local system (the window of the O.S. opens for the selection of the file) and select the file. The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the display of WEB LCT is running). 5. Set the download type to be executed. Select the option: Forced, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to the main controller of the equipment is on progress. Only different or not present/peripheral, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to peripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.
6. Activate the Bench switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been updated.
120
7. Press Start and confirm. Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be forwarded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal. The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment. If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording Interrupted is displayed in the Bench Status box of the branch whose firmware you are updating. If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Bench Status box of the branch whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires some minutes: Starting. The operation has been started. Downloading. The operation is running. The Abort push-button, present in the Bench Status box during the firmware update, can be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation. During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it updates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time. If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated components. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the bench will be in Not Loaded status). In this case, the main controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of the firmware. Completed (refresh in 20 sec). The update operation is ended and the window will automatically refresh in 20 seconds. The refresh of the window can be forced, before the expiry of 20 seconds, pressing Refresh. After the update, the Software Version box (see Fig.31) points out the new firmware version.
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller
It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the firmware is on progress (wording Downloading - see Fig.31) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present into a bench (wording Not Loaded). The switching between the memory benches DOES NOT stop the traffic. 1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see Fig.31). 2. Select the Bench Switch tab. The Bench Switch tab opens. 3. Press Bench switch and confirm. The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status and vice versa.
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment

1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens. 2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab. The tab displays the version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment (see Fig.32).
121
Fig.32 Web LCT tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Fig.32 notes (1) The wording Web LCT ALC Plus 2 points out the WEB LCT application for the control and the management of ALCplus2 IDU equipment.
To update the WEB LCT application

1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens. 2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab (see Fig.32). 3. Press Browse. The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens. 4. Select the file (with .tar extension) you wish to use for the update. The Status box points out the version of WEB LCT present in the file. 5. Press Upload and the confirm. Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equipment and the one present in the terminal is checked. The check consists in comparing the type of equipment. If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the Status box displays the message Error: Probable cause wrong...). If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Status, Total Bytes and Bytes Loaded boxes dynamically point out the progress of the operation which requires some minutes. At the end of the operation, a message informs about the result of the operation. 6. Close and re-open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment, which the update has been executed for, to avoid misalignment between the displayed data and the new WEB LCT.
To verify the communication stack in use

1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens.
122
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab. The tab displays the communication stack in use (see Fig.33). Fig.33 IP/OSI stack switch tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Fig.33 notes (1) Wording: IP. Communication stack Full IP OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI
To modify the communication stack in use

1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens. 2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab (see Fig.33). 3. Into the SYSTEM password required box, type the access code of System user. 4. Select the option relevant to the new communication stack: IP or OSI. 5. Press Apply and confirm. At the end of the operation, the message Operation Done is displayed. 6. Press Restart and confirm.

After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones. 1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command. The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens. 2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab (see Fig.33). 3. Press Restart and confirm.
123
Update of the equipment firmware (more info)

The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the entire equipment (firmware of the main controller firmware of the peripheral units). The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status. Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment. It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The WEB LCT automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (wording Loaded or Not Loaded - see Fig.31).
124
BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION
Curr. Profile
The Backup/Restore Configuration command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration. In detail, it is possible: To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) (pag.125). To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) (pag.125). To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) (pag.126).
For more information about the backup/restore of the equipment configuration, go to pag.126.
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup)

1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage the operation of FTP for the file transfer. 2. Select the Main Menu > Backup/Restore Configuration command. The Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area opens (see Fig.34). 3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the name of the file and the path where you wish to save the file. It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present in the file will be overwritten. 4. Press Backup. The Operation status box displays the progress of the operation as messages. During the operation, the Abort push-button is available. Pressing it and confirming, the operation is interrupted. The display of the message Completed in the Operation status box points out that the operation has been executed with success.
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore)

1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage the operation of FTP for the file transfer. 2. Select the Main Menu > Backup/Restore Configuration command. The Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area opens (see Fig.34). 3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration. It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or select the Browse local system option (the O.S. window for the selection of the file opens) and select the file. 4. Press Restore and confirm. The Operation status box displays the progress of the operation as messages. During the operation, the Abort push-button is available. Pressing it and confirming, the operation is interrupted. The display of the message Completed in the Operation status box points out that the operation has been executed with success.
125
To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert)
1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage the operation of FTP for the file transfer. 2. Select the Main Menu > Backup/Restore Configuration command. The Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area opens (see Fig.34). 3. Press Revert and confirm. The Operation status box displays the progress of the operation as messages. During the operation, the Abort push-button is available. Pressing it and confirming, the operation is interrupted. The display of the message Completed in the Operation status box points out that the operation has been executed with success. Fig.34 Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area
Fig.34 notes (1) Format of date, time: month/day/year, hour:minutes:seconds. The wording Unavailable points out that the file is not available.
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)

The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup - pag.125). The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the user needs. Then, in any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore - pag.125). Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps it available until the successive restore operation. In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert - pag.126). In this way, two backup versions will be always available for an equipment: one executed by the user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.
126
UNIT LIST
Curr. Profile
The Unit List command displays the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration).
To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration)

1. Select the Main Menu > Unit List command. The Unit Table contextual area opens, where the characteristics of the equipment units are displayed (see Fig.35). Fig.35 Unit Table contextual area
Fig.35 notes (1) Parameter: Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not physically present into the equipment. Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not foreseen. HW Version. Unit version. Part Number. Part Number of the unit. Par Part Num. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself. Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.
127
(2)
Each box identifies an alarm. In detail: Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning. Mis. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter). Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the WEB LCT interrogations. HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected Type parameter). SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Rel. column) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Rel Bench 1 or Rel Bench 2 column) (see Fig.31).
The colour of the boxes represents the status of the alarm and the severity coupled with the alarm itself: (3) Green. Alarm deactivated. Red. Alarm activated coupled with the Critical severity level. Orange. Alarm activated coupled with the Major severity level. Yellow. Alarm activated coupled with the Minor severity level. Light blue. Alarm activated coupled with the Warning severity level.
For each alarm inside the box, the total number of active alarms of the specific type in the equipment units is pointed out.
128
ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION
Curr. Profile
The Active Manual Operation command manages the manual operations. In detail, it is possible: To verify active the manual operations (pag.129). To verify/modify the manual operation timeout (pag.130).
To verify the active manual operations

1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command. The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens, where the manual operations actually activated into the equipment are displayed (see Fig.36). Fig.36 Active Manual Operations contextual area
Fig.36 notes (1) The information present into the contextual area are not dynamically updated. Press Refresh to update the information. The value 0 points out that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.
(2)
129
To verify/modify the manual operation timeout

The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment. 1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command. The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens (see Fig.36). 2. Use the scrolling arrows to set a timeout comprised between 1 and 172800 seconds (48 hours). The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout (it means that the activation operations of the manual forcing will not be automatically disabled but the user will have to execute such operations). 3. Press Apply and confirm.
130
ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION
Curr. Profile
The Alarm Severity Configuration command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level. In detail, it is possible: To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms (pag.131). To enable/disable an alarm (pag.132). To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm (pag.132). To change the severity level of an alarm (pag.133).
For more information about the enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm go to pag.133.
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command. The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens, where the severity level, the alarm enabling status, the alarm forwarding status and a possible management system external to the equipment (for example, SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX) are displayed (see Fig.37). Fig.37 Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area
131
Fig.37 notes (1) To display the alarm list select the symbol. To hide the alarm list select the symbol.
The number of alarms present in the group is displayed next to the name of the group (between brackets). The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration. (2) Wording: (3) Trap Enable. The forwarding of the trap is enabled. Trap Disable. The forwarding of the trap is not enabled.
In detail: X Disabled. Memorization of the alarm disabled. <Coloured box> Critical, Major, etc. Memorization of the alarm enabled. The severity level is pointed out by the colour of the box and by the name of the level.
The wording Unavailable in this SW ver. points out that the involved alarm is not supported by the current firmware version present into the equipment controller.
To enable/disable an alarm
1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command. The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.37). 2. Select the alarm. 3. Select the relevant Edit wording. The Configuration window opens. 4. Into the Severity area, select the following option: Disable, to disable the alarm. Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the severity level to be assigned to the alarm
5. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm

It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm (pag.132). 1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command. The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.37). 2. Select the alarm. 3. Select the relevant Edit wording. The Configuration window opens. 4. Into the Trap area, select the following option: Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX). Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
5. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
132
To change the severity level of an alarm

1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command. The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.37). 2. Select the alarm. 3. Select the relevant Edit wording. The Configuration window opens. 4. In the Severity area, select the option relevant to the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modifying the alarm severity level, automatically enables it. 5. Press Ok. The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)

The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed for each single alarm of each single equipment. Enabling/disabling the alarms The term alarm means the fault signal generated by an error or by a wrong operation of the equipment or of any element that compose it. The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs. Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm had never occurred. On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next item), it is communicated to the management system, which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms. Enabling/disabling the forwarding of the alarm traps The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by the equipment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/ NMS5LX. The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to his own needs. Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program. On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system, which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms. Alarm severity Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level which determinates the importance of the alarm. This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.
133
VIEW LOGGED USER
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator System
The View Logged User command manages the users connected to the equipment. In detail, it is possible: To verify the users connected to the equipment (pag.134). To force the logout of a user (pag.135).
To verify the users connected to the equipment

1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command. The View Logged User contextual area opens, where the list of the users connected to the equipment when the command is selected is displayed (see Fig.38). Fig.38 View Logged User contextual area
Fig.38 notes (1) The wording NMS5UX points out the user of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login). The other ones identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users. (2) With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the server, the workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by the user is actually running.
134
To force the logout of a user

Logging out oneself is not possible. If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automatically executes the restore of the user login. 1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command. The View Logged User contextual area opens (see Fig.38). 2. Select the wished user. 3. Press Force Logout and confirm. Into the View Logged User contextual area, the system removes the line relevant to the selected user. If the Force Logout push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to ones user has been selected.
135
USER MANAGER
Curr. Profile
System
The User Manager command manages the list of the equipment users. In detail, it is possible: To verify the user list (pag.136). To add a user to the list (pag.137). To change a user into the list (pag.137). To delete a user from the list (pag.138). To change the password and timeout of the System user (System Password) (pag.138) To change the network password and network timeout (Network Password) (pag.138) To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM Password) (pag.139) To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (pag.139).
For more information about the user list go to pag.140.
To verify the user list

1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens, where the user list currently stored in the equipment is displayed (see Fig.39). Fig.39 User Manager contextual area
Fig.39 notes (1) The user with: Read Only profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) but it can not forward commands or execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
136
Read and Write profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) and execute only maintenance operations (MAN OP). Station Operator, can as check the parameters (reading operation) as send commands or execute changes (writing operation *) to the equipment configuration. * Except for the following operations: modifying the Remote Element Table, the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the User Manager contextual area. (2) Wording: No Timeout. The option is disabled, this means that the user is not automatically disconnected after a defined time range. <number> Sec. The option is enabled, this means that the user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page) will be disconnected after the specified time range.
To add a user to the list

Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of 12 users). 1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the Add command. The Add User window opens. 3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when the user name has been assigned, it can not be changed later. 4. Into the Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). 5. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code of the user. 6. Into the Timeout box, set the option: No timeout, if the user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout, if the user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page) must be disconnected after the specified time range set into the Sec box. To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h). 7. Into the Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user: Read only, Read and write or Station operator. It is not possible to create a user with System profile. 8. Press OK. The new user is inserted into the User Manager contextual area. 9. Press Apply and confirm.
To modify a user into the list

1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39).
137
2. Select the record relevant to the user. 3. Select the Modify command. The Modify User window opens. 4. Execute the changing. The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. To add a user to the list (pag.137). It is necessary to set again all the user parameters (password, timeout, profile) with the exception of the user name that can not be changed. 5. Press OK. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To delete a user from the list

1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the record relevant to the user. 3. Select the Remove command. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Password)
1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the System command. The Change System Password window opens. 3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new access code of System user (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). 4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the access code. 5. Into the Timeout box, select the option: No timeout, if the System user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout, if the System user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page), has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box. To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h). 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To change the network password and timeout (Network Password)

If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in the Enter new password and Confirm new password fields. 1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the Network command. The Change Network Password window opens.
138
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new network password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8). 4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the new network password. 5. Into the Timeout box, select the option: No timeout, if the remote equipment (if it is in Monitor status) has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout, if you wish that the remote equipment, if in Monitor status, if no operation is executed, is disconnected after the period set in the Sec. box To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h). 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password)
The changing of the CEM password has to be executed only if it is changed the default password used by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system. If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current CEM password into the Enter new password and Confirm new password fields. 1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the CEM command. The Change CEM Password window opens. 3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new CEM password (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to 8) 4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the CEM password. 5. Into the Timeout box, select the option: No timeout, if the NMS5UX user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range. Timeout, if the NMS5UX user, (if the application does not execute any operation), has to be disconnected after the time range set into the Sec box. To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and 43200 sec. (12h). 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment of remote users
The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does not need for a login password. It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users. 1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command. The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.39). 2. Select the PermaLogin command. The Permanent Login window opens. 3. Into the Manager IP Address 1 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
139
It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 4. Into the Manager IP Address 2 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user. It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised between 0 and 255. 5. Pressing the Reset push-button next to the relevant Manager IP Address box, the value is set to zero (0.0.0.0). 6. Activate the option Trap Version 2, under the relevant Manager IP Address box, to set the trap management of version 2 (SNMP). If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMP) of the traps is used. 7. Press Apply and confirm.
User list (more info)

The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment. If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment. With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to an equipment have to be set by the WEB LCT application (see pag.137), the SCT/LMT program or NMS5UX/ NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system. Each equipment, that can be managed by the WEB LCT application or by the SCT/LMT program, is equipped with two pre-defined users: SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features: User name Timeout Profile Password System (unchangeable parameter). No Timeout (changeable parameter). System (unchangeable parameter) Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see pag.138)
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted. Only this user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list. The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration. NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features: User name Timeout Profile Password NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter). No Timeout (changeable parameter). System (unchangeable parameter) Pre-define (changeable parameter - see pag.139)
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted. This user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list of the equipment by means of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX graphic interface. More information about the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation. The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
140
FEATURES MANAGEMENT
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator System
The Features Management command manages the functionalities (modulation, synchronisation, OSPF protocol, etc.) enabled for the equipment. In detail, it is possible: To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment (pag.141). To enable the new functionalities (pag.142).
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment

1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command. The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens, where the functionalities enabled on demand is displayed (seeFig.40). Fig.40 Equipment Feature Management contextual area
Fig.40 notes (1) Functionalities: Maximum equipment modulation: Upgrade up to 8PSK Upgrade up to 16QAM Upgrade up to 32QAM Upgrade up to 64QAM Upgrade up to 128QAM Upgrade up to 256QAM Upgrade up to 14M
Channel spacing:
141
(2)
Upgrade up to 28M Upgrade up to 56M
Adaptive modulation: ACM functionality Synchronisation: Sync eth support (ALCplus2 only) OSPF protocol: OSPF functionality Fade Margin (calculation of the link margin): Built-in Fade Margin Facility
Wording: Enabled. The functionality is enabled. Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
To enable the new functionalities

In order to enable one or more functionalities, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate, represented by a file (with .sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment. For each equipment you wish to enable one or more functionalities, a specific enabling certificate is required, because there is an univocal link between each single certificate and each specific equipment. 1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command. The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens (see Fig.40). 2. Press Browse. The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens. 3. Select the enabling certificate (file with .sfc extension). 4. Press Open. The selected file is indicated in the Status - Ready to send:... box. 5. Press Send Certificate File. A message indicates the end and the result of the operation: Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success. Invalid operation for this equipment. The selected certificate and equipment are not compatible (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).
142
RMON
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The RMON command manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment. The managed counters are described in RFC 2819 History Control Group. In detail, it is possible: To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports (pag.143) To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.144) To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.144) To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (pag.144)
For more information about the implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT go to pag.146.
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports
1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command. The RMON area is displayed showing the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the statistics (see Fig.41). Fig.41 Remote Monitoring contextual area
Fig.41 notes (1) Wording: Stopped. The count is not on progress. Running. The count is on progress.
143
To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port

1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command. The RMON contextual area opens (see Fig.41). 2. Press Open at the side of the port in Stopped status to be activated. The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.42). 3. Press Start and confirm. The count is started-up.
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port

The deactivation of the count involves the loss of the collected data. 1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command. The RMON contextual area opens (see Fig.41). 2. Press Open at the side of the port in Running status to be deactivated. The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.42). 3. Press Stop and confirm. The count is stopped.
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)

Operation meaningful only for Ethernet ports for which the count of the RMON statistics is active. To active the count see pag.144. 1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command. The RMON contextual area opens (see Fig.41). 2. Press Open at the side of the wished port in Running status. The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window is displayed, showing the evolution in time (history) of the statistic counters from the start of the count (see Fig.42).
144
Fig.42 Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window
Fig.42 notes (1) Command: Refresh. It updates the data. Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the count, the second one reactivates it. Freeze/Unfreeze. The commands are displayed one as an alternative to the other: the first one interrupts the dynamic display of the values in the window (freezes the window), the second one reactivates it. When the window is opened, the dynamic display of the values is active by default. Counter View. It manages the display of the counters in the window. When the command is selected, the Select Counters window is opened where every counter has a box on its side. If the box is: Active ( Inactive ( ). The counter is present in the Remote Monitoring... window ). The counter is not present in the Remote Monitoring... window
To activate (or deactivate) the display of a counter, activate (or deactivate) the relevant box and press Ok. (2) For the description of the counter go to pag.147. For the Octets counter between brackets, the number of bytes within a second (KB/s) is pointed out. (3) This parameter points out the seconds missing to the end of the current sampling interval, at the end of which the new row is displayed.
145
(4)
The statistic counters of the considered Ethernet port are freezed by the equipment each minute. For each port, the equipment can store a maximum of 120 samples (corresponding to 2 hours). When the maximum value is reached, the new data will overwrite the oldest ones.
(5)
At the end of a sampling interval, for each counter, the pointed out value corresponds to the value registered during the measuring interval.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT

RMON Standard RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count, monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network. These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMON standard The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote management station). The agent saves the data within its own RMON tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers, etc.). The RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the device to monitor. The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent to obtain and correlate the RMON data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and the analysis of the collected RMON data.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the RMON functionality acts as client which, through the commands present in the WEB LCT page, allows the analysis of the data collected by the probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet switch of the equipment in compliance with the RMON standard (currently, the ALCplus2 IDU equipment by the WEB LCT implement the RMON MIB group: History). The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment. The history of the statistics of every equipment stores, each 60 seconds (sampling range), the value of the counters of each active Ethernet port. The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when full, the new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 120 samples which allow storing 2 hours in the equipment). In order to store in the equipment and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the port (see pag.144). This port will remain active until when an user (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) does not deactivate it (see pag.144). At the activation of the port, the equipment starts storing the data relevant to the statistics and makes them available to the user, in form of table, subdivided by single Ethernet port (see pag.144). During the count, the display of the data in the WEB LCT window can be interrupted. This operation does not interrupt the count, but freezes only the data present in the window. In fact, when the data update is re-activated, the window displays the values of all the sampling ranges (up to a maximum of 120), even those stored in the equipment while the window was freezed.
146
Ethernet counters (RMON) The description of the counters is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from an Ethernet port (LAN Statistics - see pag.274). The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters with respect to the LAN Statistics counters. Tab.2 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters. The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON counter and has the following description: the best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in hundredths of a percent. Tab.2 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON) Ethernet counters denomination RMON - History Drop Events Octects Pkts Broadcasts Pkts Multicasts Pkts CRC Align Errors Undersize Pkts Oversize Pkts Fragments Jabbers Collisions Utilization Ethernet counters denomination LAN Statistics Dropped Frames Total Bytes Received Total Frames Received Broadcast Frames Received Multicast Frames Received CRC Align Errors Undersize Frames Oversize Frames Fragments Jabbers Collisions -
147
EQUIPMENT MENU
In the Equipment Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present: Main Menu (pag.149). It displays the Main Menu commands into the contextual area of the WEB LCT page. Equipment (pag.150). It manages the equipment configuration. Synchronisation (pag.167). It manages the synchronism sources. Base Band (pag.182). It manages the base band parameters. Radio (pag.265). It manages the radio parameters. Maintenance (pag.273). It manages the loops, PRBS, switching modality, Fade Margin, etc. Switch (pag.291). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream. User Input (pag.299). It manages the local and remote user input. User Output (pag.305). It manages the user output.
For equipment in protected configuration the commands relevant to the management of the redundant parts of the modem and of the radio section are subdivided according to the branches managed by the equipment. For example, in case of equipment in protected configuration, two commands will be available for the radio parameters: Radio Branch 1A and Radio Branch 2A. The first one refers to branch 1, the second one to branch 2.
For each command, in the relative description, it is pointed out the user profile necessary to be able to use it. In detail, the wording: Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status. Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.
148
MAIN MENU
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The Main Menu command displays the commands of the Main Menu (pag.35) into the contextual area of the WEB LCT page.
149
EQUIPMENT
At the choice of Equipment option, the program displays the following commands: Configurator (pag.151). It manages the equipment configuration. Mod. Cap/Link ID (pag.156). It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link identification number. General Preset (pag.164). It manages the modem ad radio parameters.
150
Configurator
Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator, System
The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration. In detail, it is possible to verify/modify: The radio configuration (Radio A) (pag.151) The management of STM-1 stream (STM-1 MST Mode) (pag.153) The management of synchronisation (Sync Enable) (pag.153) The management of nodal configuration (Nodal Configuration) (pag.153) The equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) (Node Id) (pag.154) The number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...) (Number of Nodes) (pag.154) The equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal ID) (pag.154) The number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal Type) (pag.154) The protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus) (Nodal Protection) (pag.155)
To verify/modify the radio configuration

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Radio A parameter points out the equipment radio configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: 1+0. Unprotected configuration. 1+1 Hot Standby. Protected configuration of isofrequency type. 1+1 Freq. Div. Protected configuration of heterofrequency type.
3. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.43 Configurator contextual area
151
Fig.43 notes (1) This area displays a schematic representation of the units equipped in the equipment. This representation dynamically changes depending on the user settings. Option: Radio A. Radio configuration: 1+0. Unprotected configuration. 1+1 Hot Standby. Protected configuration of isofrequential type. 1+1 Freq. Div. Protected configuration of hetero-frequential type. None. The management of STM-1 stream is not active. 1+0. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active. 1+1 MSP. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active and the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active. 1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of the STM-1 stream in MST mode is active and the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active. For the STM-1 streams with optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
(2)
STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1 stream:
The option is available and meaningful only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1. Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation: Disable. Synchronisation disable. Enable. Synchronisation enable. No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to any nodal configuration. AlcPlus2 (not protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is not protected. AlcPlus2 (protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is not protected. AlPlus. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration composed by equipment of series ALS with AL IDU plus.
Nodal Configuration. Management of nodal configuration:
The option is available and meaningful only for ALCplus 2 equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1. Only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value: AlcPlus2 (not protected) or AlcPlus2 (Protected) is set, the following options are available: Number of Nodes. Number of equipment present in the nodal configuration (ALCplus2). Node Id. Number identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (ALCplus2).
AlPlus is set, the following options are available: Nodal ID. Name identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (ALplus): Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node A. Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node B. Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node C. 2 Element. Nodal configuration with two equipment. 3 Element. Nodal configuration with three equipment. No Protected. The nodal bus are in unprotected configuration. Protected. The nodal bus are in protected configuration.
Nodal Type. Number of equipment present in the nodal configuration (ALplus):
Nodal Protection. Management of nodal protection (ALplus):
152
To verify/modify the management of STM-1 stream

Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The STM-1 MST Mode parameter points out the management of the STM-1 stream (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: None. The management of STM-1 stream is not active. 1+0. The management of STM-1 stream is active in MST mode. 1+1 MSP. The management of STM-1 stream is active and the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active. 1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of STM-1 stream is active and the protection of STM-1 stream (MSP mode) is active. For STM-1 streams with optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled.
To verify/modify the management of synchronisation

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Sync Enable parameter points out the management of synchronisation (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: Disable. Synchronisation disable. Enable. Synchronisation enable.
To verify/modify the management of nodal configuration

Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Nodal Configuration parameter points out the management of nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: No Nodal. The equipment does not belong to any nodal configuration. AlcPlus2 (not protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is not protected. AlcPlus2 (protected). The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration. The nodal bus is protected. AlPlus. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration composed by equipment of series ALS with AL IDU plus.
153
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...)

Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlcPlus2 (not protected) or AlcPlus2 (protected) is set. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Node Id parameter points out the number identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter set in the box a number comprised between 1 and 8. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (AlcPlus2...)

Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlcPlus2 (not protected) or AlcPlus2 (protected) is set. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Number of Nodes parameter points out the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter set in the box a number comprised between 1 and 8. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus)

Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlPlus is set. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Nodal ID parameter points out the name identifying the equipment in the nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node A. Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node B. Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal configuration as node C.
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus)

Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlPlus is set. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Nodal Type parameter points out the number of equipment of the nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: 2 Element. Nodal configuration with two equipment. 3 Element. Nodal configuration with three equipment.
154
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus)

Operation available and meaningful only if, for the Nodal Configuration option, the value AlPlus is set. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command. The Configurator contextual area opens. The Nodal Protection parameter points out the protection of the nodal configuration (see Fig.43). 2. To change the parameter select the option: No Protected. The nodal parts are in unprotected configuration. Protected. The nodal parts are in protected configuration.
155
Mod. Cap/Link ID
The Mod. Cap/Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link identification number In detail, it is possible: To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation (pag.156). To display the table summarizing the radio transport (pag.158). To modify the reference band/modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation) (pag.159). To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation (ACM Engine) (pag.159). To modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation. These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself. In detail, if the adaptive modulation is: Active, it is possible: To modify the power profile of RF transmitter (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode) (pag.159). To modify the lower and upper thresholds of the modulation (Upper Modulation/Lower Modulation) (pag.160). To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.160). To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.160). To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.160). To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) (Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.160).
Inactive, it is possible:
To verify/modify the link identification number (pag.160) To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.161)
The operation: To verify/modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Permanent TDM Traffic) is NOT available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type. To verify/modify the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) is NOT available for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard type.
For more information about the adaptive modulation go to pag.162.
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.44). When the window is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected reference band/modulation. If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled. In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (pushbutton Apply) the new reference band/modulation.
156
Fig.44 Modulation & Capacity tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.44 notes (1) ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation. Option: (2) Enable. The adaptive modulation is enabled. Disable. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
Tx Power Constant Peak Mode. Power profile of the RF transmitter. Option: Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases. Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled. The profile is used only if a modulation corresponding to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference. (3) Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation. For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured. (4) Tx Power Mode. Current status of the power profile of the RF transmitter. Value: (5) Average. Mean power constant when the modulation changes. Peak. Power increasing when the modulation changes
Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx modulation. This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
(6)
Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams assigned permanently (high priority streams). These streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation. The maximum number of E1 streams which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the box. This parameter is available and meaningful only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
(7)
ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 streams which can be used. Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available. In detail, if the adaptive modulation is: Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).
157
Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
(8)
Use the scrolling bar to display the detail of all the ACM profiles. Selecting the arrow , it is possible to expand the list in such a way to display all the ACM profiles at the same time. To return to the standard display, select the arrow .
(9)
ACM profile. 8 profiles ACM are available from 4AQM to 256QAM. An additional profile on 4QAM with low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too. Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for every ACM profile. Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile. These streams will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user (see Fig.47). Pressing this push-button displays the table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision between Ethernet and E1, in relation to the current band/modulation (see Fig.45).
(10)
(11)
(12)
To display the table summarizing the radio transport

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. 2. Press View Current Config. The table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision between Ethernet and E1, in relation to the current reference band/modulation is displayed (see Fig.45). Fig.45 Table summarizing the radio transport
Fig.45 notes (1) Equipment identifier. The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment. (2) Column: Active Modulation. ACM profile. Global Capacity. Global capacity associated to the ACM profile. The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity + TDM High Priority + TDM Low Priority + Maintenance Channel.
158
Ethernet Capacity. Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries. TDM Capacity - High Priority. Capacity used by the high priority E1 tributaries (static). The value is given by: Permanent TDM Traffic + Local Remote Telemetry Link. For the ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type the Permanent TDM Traffic value is 0.
TDM Capacity - Low Priority. Capacity used by the low priority E1 tributaries (dynamic) (Extra TDM Traffic). Tx Power. Power in output to the transmitter.
To modify the reference band/modulation

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter points out the current reference band/modulation (see Fig.44). For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured. 2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm. If the message Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned is displayed, the selected band/modulation is not enabled for the equipment. Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Features Management (pag.141) command.
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The ACM Engine parameter points out the operating status of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.44). 2. To modify the parameter, select the option: Disable. Adaptive modulation disabled. Enable. Adaptive modulation enabled.
If the option Enable is not available, the use of the adaptive modulation is not enabled. Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Features Management (pag.141) command . 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)

Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled. The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The Tx Power Constant Peak Mode parameter points out the power profile of the RF transmitter (see Fig.44). 2. To modify the parameter, select the value: Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases. Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
159
To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively points out the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the modulation (see Fig.44). 2. To modify the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the wished modulation. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)

Operation available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter points out the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (see Fig.44). 2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active. The Extra TDM Cap parameter points out the number of E1 streams which must be kept active for the specific ACM profile (see Fig.44). 2. To modify the parameter, use the scrolling arrows to set the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the link identification number

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Local Link ID tab. The Local Link ID parameter points out the link identification number (see Fig.46). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255). The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number. 4. Press Apply and confirm. The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote equipment.
160
Fig.46 Local Link ID tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.46 notes (1) The current value is displayed into the Value field. The lack of selection of said identification (value=0) is shown by the wording Not Used.
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command. The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Extra TDM Priority tab. The tab displays the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) Fig.47 shows an example. 3. In order to modify the sequence, execute one of the following actions: Move a single E1 upwards by one place (higher priority) Select the tributary and press Up. Move a single E1 downwards by one place (lower priority). Select the tributary and press Down. Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: A, B, 1, 2, 3, ... n *. Press A B 1-16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or A B 1-19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment). Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: 1, 2, 3, ... n*, A, B. Press 1-16 A B (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 1-19 A B (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment). * n = 16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
161
Fig.47 Extra TDM Priority tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Fig.47 notes (1) Wording: A. Tributary A (first E1 tributary of base board). B. Tributary B (second E1 tributary of base board). 1...n. E1 radio. n = 16 (equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion) or 19 (equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion). When an E1 stream is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within the maximum number of Extra TDM E1 streams carried by the configured radio frame. For example, in the figure the maximum number of Extra TDM streams configured for the radio transport is 8. Then, the first 8 E1s from top to bottom in the list will be displayed black, the remnant ones grey. The order, as displayed in the window, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to lowest one (last position in the list). This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the adaptive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on until reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the adaptive modulation.
Adaptive modulation (more info)

Ethernet transport ALCplus2 IDU equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface. Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.
TDM transport (ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type) The TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 streams which must be transported.
162
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following: a. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 2 (ALCplus2 IDU equipment of IduBoard type) or 18 (ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion). b. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user. Key: Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile. Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile.
TDM transport (ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion) The TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic (high priority) and not shareable with the Ethernet band (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, possibly shareable with the Ethernet traffic (Extra TDM Cap). The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following: a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box. b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (WEB LCT highlights the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set disabling all the not allowed modulations). c. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21. d. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user. e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, WEB LCT only highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of the ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at users charge. Key: Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile. Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile. Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams permanently assigned (high priority streams).
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (Extra TDM Cap) The user, via WEB LCT, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.47). This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the network operator. The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws. The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power of the reference modulation. More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2 IDU.
163
General Preset
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters. In detail, it is possible to verify/modify: Threshold level of the signal at reception (pag.164) Enabling of the switch in transmission (pag.164) T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) (pag.165) Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) (pag.166) Radio branch label (pag.166)
To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command. The General Preset contextual area opens with the General tab active. The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter points out the threshold level of the signal at reception (see Fig.48). Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm. 2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level. 3. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.48 General tab (General Preset contextual area)
To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission

Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command. The General Preset contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab.
164
In the Tx Switch Control area the enabling of the switch in transmission is displayed (see Fig.49). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled. Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.
4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.49 Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (General Preset contextual area)
Fig.49 notes (1) Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences of alarms (BER Alarm, Demodulator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment located at the other side of the link (remote equipment). If active, the option: (2) Enable, the switch is enabled. Disable, the switch is not enabled.
When the switch in transmission is active (see previous note), this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. The box: Check Period, points out the time interval T. Alarm Threshold, points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment. (3) The Transmitter Switch on Remote... notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms on the signal received from the remote equipment.
To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control)

Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command. The General Preset contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.49).
165
The box: Check Period points out the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place. Alarm Threshold points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
3. To modify the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between 1 and 300; Alarm Threshold: value between 1 and 60). 4. Press Apply and confirm. When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch Control), this switch is executed when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contemporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control)

Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1 etherofrequential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command. The General Preset contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.49).
3. Press Alarm Reset.
To verify/modify the radio branch label

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command. The General Preset contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Radio Branch Label tab. The Radio Branch Label parameter points out the label that identifies the radio branch (see Fig.50). 3. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters). 4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.50 Radio Branch Label tab (General Preset contextual area)
166
SYNCHRONISATION
Curr. Profile
Monitor, Read Only Read and Write*, Station Operator, System
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). This command is available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Fig.43) The Synchronisation command manages the synchronism sources. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status of the synchronism sources (pag.167) To manage the synchronism sources in input: To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.169) To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input (pag.171) To force the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.171) To set a synchronism source in input as preferential (pag.172) To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 (pag.172) To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) (pag.172) To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input (pag.173) To force the status of the T0 synchronisation (pag.173) To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism (pag.173)
To manage the equipment inner synchronism (T0):
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface (output/ input) of tributary A/B (pag.174) To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.175)
For more information about the management of synchronisation go to pag.176.
To verify the status of the synchronism sources

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active. The tab displays the status of the synchronism sources (see Fig.51).
167
Fig.51 SETS tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Fig.51 notes (1) Each synchronization source in input is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are illustrated here below.
a. Wording: TE LAN-3. Source extracted from LAN 3. TE LAN-4. Source extracted from LAN 4. T2/T3 1. Source extracted from the tributary A. T2/T3 2. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 tributaries of the expansion. RADIO (T0). Source extracted from the Radio. STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0). Source extracted from the STM-1 tributary or from the Nodal Bus 2. NODAL 1 (T0). Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1. STM-1. Source extracted from the STM-1 tributary. Internal Source. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8 MHz STRATUM 3).
The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.3. In the boxes representing the synchronism sources in input for which the user can change the parameters, the mouse cursor assumes the shape of an hand. The Internal Source synchronism source has not configuration parameters. b. Wording: P: D. The synchronism source is not enabled. P: <19>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority). Trib. A. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary A). Trib. B. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary B).
c. Wording:
168
Trib. <number>. E1 tributary of the expansion. STM-1. Tributary STM-1. Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.
Not all the synchronism sources are provided with this information. d. Colour box: (2) White. The source in input has not been manually forced by the operator for the generation of the T0 synchronism. Light blue. The source has been manually forced (Manual Operation). White. There are not active alarms. Red. At least one source alarm has been activated.
e. Colour box:
T0: equipment inner synchronism.
a. Wording: (Locked). The input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically present, the relevant signal is valid and it is used by the equipment for the creation of the inner synchronism. (Hold Over). All the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment keeps the estimated frequency of the last used external source. (Free Running). The T0 synchronism is created by equipment inner reference (Internal Source), because the other input synchronism sources are not physically present, their signal is degraded or they are disabled. White. The user has not forced the status of the T0 synchronism. Light blue. The user has forced the status of the T0 synchronism (Manual Operation). White. There are not active alarms. Red. At least one T0 alarm has been activated.
b. Colour box:
c. Colour box:
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source. The Configuration: <source name> window opens. The Timing Sink Priority area points out the usage status of the synchronism source (see Fig.52). 3. To enable the use of the source: a. Activate the Enabled control box. The cursor label changes from Priority: Input to Priority: <number>. b. Move the cursor on a number comprised between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority). To disable the use of the source: a. Deactivate the Enabled control box. The cursor label changes from Priority: <number> to Priority: Input. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
169
Fig.52 Configuration <input synchronism source> window
Fig.52 notes (1) The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
(2)
Option: Forced Switch Off. The source is not forced for the generation of the internal synchronism. Forced Switch On. The source is forced for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(3)
Option: Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources. Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(4)
The box Enabled points out the use status of the source. In detail, if the box is Active. The source is enabled to use. Inactive. The source is not enabled to use.
The parameter Priority: <19> points out the priority level of the source: 1 maximum priority, 9 minimum priority. The word Priority: Input points out that the source is not enabled. (5) If the selected synchronism source in input is: T2/T3 1. The Source E1 area contains the Type parameter which points out the interface of tributary A: T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface. T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
T2/T3 2. The Source E1 area contains the Unit parameter which points out the tributary used as synchronism source: Trib. B. Tributary B.
170
If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter Type which points out the interface of tributary B: T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface. T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion. If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter PPI which points out the number of the tributary (2Mb/s interface) selected as synchronism source. The Trib. 1-16 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. The Trib. 1-32 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion.
STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0). The Source area contains a box pointing out the type of source used as synchronism: STM-1. STM-1 stream. Value available only if the management of STM-1 stream is active. Nodal 2. Second nodal bus. Value available only if the management of the nodal management is active.
The synchronism sources TE LAN-3, TE LAN-4, RADIO (T0), STM-1 and NODAL 1 (T0) are not provided with the Source area.
To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input

Operation available and meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source. The Configuration: <source name> window opens. The Timing Sink Priority area points out the priority level of the source (see Fig.52). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the number representing the wished priority. The user can set a number between 1 and 9, where 1 represents the highest priority and 9 the lowest one. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the use of a synchronism source in input

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source. The Configuration: <source name> window opens. The Manual Operation parameter points out the forcing status of the source (see Fig.52). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Forced Switch Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchronism. Forced Switch On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchronism.
171
4. Press Apply. Only if you are activating the forcing a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential

Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.51). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source. The Configuration: <source name> window opens. The Manual Switch parameter points out if the source is used as preferential (see Fig.52). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources. Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation of the internal synchronism.
To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source T2/T3 2. The Configuration: T2/T3 2 window opens. The Source E1 area points out the tributary used as synchronism source (see Fig.52). 3. To change the parameter, in the box Unit select the value: Trib. B. Tributary B. When this value is selected, the Type box is displayed which points out the interface used by the tributary B. Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion. When this value is selected, the cursor PPI <number of the selected PPI> is displayed. Move the cursor over the wished number of tributary. The Trib. 1-16 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. The Trib. 1-32 value is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0)

Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 and if the management of the STM-1 stream and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see Fig.43).
172
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0). The Configuration: STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) window opens. The Source area points out the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) (see Fig.52). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: STM-1. STM-1 stream (value available only if the management of the STM-1 stream is active). Nodal 2. Second nodal bus (value available only if the management of the nodal configuration is active).
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the input synchronism source. The Configuration: <source name> window opens. The Alarms area points out the status of the alarms relevant to the source (see Fig.52).
To force the status of the T0 synchronisation

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the T0 synchronism source. The Configuration Parameters window opens. The Status Control area points out the status of the T0 synchronism: Free Running. The T0 synchronism is generated by the equipment internal reference (Internal Source). Hold Over. The Hold Over status is forced. Locked. The locking of the synchronism to an external source is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value. 4. Press Apply. Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.51). 2. Select the T0 synchronism source. The Configuration Parameters window opens.
173
The Alarm Report area points out the alarms status of the T0 synchronism. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B
The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of the tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.51). 2. Bring in front of page the E1 Source Type tab. The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and B (see Fig.53). 3. In order to modify the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option: NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.180). Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input. T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s. Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input. T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz. Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
Fig.53 E1 Source Type tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
174
Fig.53 notes (1) Parameters: NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.180). The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s. T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/ s. The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s. T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz. The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2MHz.
Setting the value T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) compromises the use of the tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of an equipment is described. For the correct configuration of the functionality for a radio link go to pag.180. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command. The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.51). 2. Bring in front of page the E1 Retiming tab. Every Tributary... box points out the activation status of the E1 re-timing function relevant to the specific tributary (see Fig.53). 3. To modify a parameter select, in the E1 Retiming area relevant to the wished tributary, the option: Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive. Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.
Fig.54 E1 Retiming tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
175
Fig.53 notes (1) Value: (2) (3) Tributary A. First E1 tributary of base board. Tributary B. Second E1 tributary of base board. Tributary <number>. E1 tributary of expansion.
Read-only value. Value: Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive. Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.
For more information about the E1 re-timing function and the modality to use the parameter for the implementation of the function in a radio link go to pag.180. (4) The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, points out whether the operation failed (alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated). The colour of the box represents the Sync Alarm status and severity: Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity. Grey. Alarm deactivated.
Management of synchronisation (more info)

ALCplus2 IDU equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled. When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the local internal reference. When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source in input, enabled and with the highest priority, is used to synchronise the local IDU (if a forcing or a preferential is not active). It is possible to generate the synchronisation in output using the tributaries A and/or B. The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see pag.153). Here below the following topics are described: Synchronism sources in input (pag.176) Internal synchronism T0 (pag.179) Synchronism in output T12 (pag.179) Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.180)
Synchronism sources in input

The equipment has more synchronism sources in input. The number/type of synchronism sources in input depends on the type/expansion of equipment (see Tab.3).
176
Enabling of the synchronism sources in input A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see pag.169).
Configuration of the synchronism sources in input For some synchronism sources, the type of source can be set (see Tab.3).
Priority of the synchronism source in input A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source in input (see pag.171). The source with the highest priority level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential source is not active). The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 points out the highest priority and 9 the lowest one. Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately lower. When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment will automatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference. The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions: The source is not physically present. The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is greater than 9,2 ppm.
Forcing of a synchronism source in input This function allows the user forcing a synchronism source in input as source from which the T0 synchronism is taken (see pag.171). This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source. This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of synchronism source in preferential input This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see pag.172). When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled source with highest priority. When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its priority level. This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source signal becomes degraded.
177
Tab.3 Synchronism sources in input

*
ALCplus2 IDU equipment
Synchronism sources in input Name TE LAN-3 TE LAN-4 T2/T3 1 T2/T3 2 Type LAN Eth LAN Eth E1 E1 Configuration LAN-3. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface LAN-4. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Synchronism from the remote terminal LAN-3. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface LAN-4. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Source configurable as: Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Tributary E1 of expansion (116) with interface T2 (2Mb/s) Synchronism from the remote terminal LAN-3. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface LAN-4 Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Source configurable as: Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Tributary E1 of expansion (132) with interface T2 (2Mb/s) Synchronism from the remote terminal STM-1. Source available only if the management of STM-1 stream is enabled LAN-3. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface LAN-4. Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Source configurable as: Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) * Tributary E1 of the expansion (116) with interface T2 (2Mb/s) Synchronism from the remote terminal Source configurable as: STM-1. Source available only if the management of STM-1 stream is active Nodal bus 2 Value available only if the management of nodal configuration is active Nodal bus 1. Value available only if the management of nodal configuration is active
IduBoard
RADIO (T0) Radio TE LAN-3 TE LAN-4 IduBoard Exp. 16E1 T2/T3 1 T2/T3 2 LAN Eth LAN Eth E1 E1
RADIO (T0) Radio TE LAN-3 TE LAN-4 IduBoard Exp 2xSTM-1 32E1 T2/T3 1 T2/T3 2 LAN Eth LAN Eth E1 E1
RADIO (T0) Radio STM-1 TE LAN-3 TE LAN-4 T2/T3 1 T2/T3 2 STM-1 LAN Eth LAN Eth E1 E1
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
RADIO (T0) Radio STM-1/ NODAL 2 (T0) NODAL 1 (T0) STM-1 or Nodal Bus Nodal Bus
* The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism in output T12 (see Fig.53).
178
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source in input, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the controller SETS of the equipment according to specific criteria: Forcing of the source Status of the source (enabled/disabled) Preferential source Source priority Status of the signal (valid/degraded) Locked, the input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically present, the relevant signal is valid and used by the equipment for the creation of the synchronism. Hold-over, all the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment keeps the estimated frequency of the last used external source. Free-running, the T0 synchronism is generated by equipment internal reference (Internal Source), because the other synchronism sources in input are not physically present, their signal is degraded or they are disabled.
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see pag.173). The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0. These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Synchronism in output T12

The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see pag.174). In this case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised. Moreover the use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the interface of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source in input (see Tab.4). Tab.4 Synchronism in output (T12) Value set as output of synchronism T12 (parameter Trib. A - Fig.53) NORMAL TRAFFIC T2 (2Mb/s) T3 (2MHz) Output of Synchronism T12 on tributary A Yes * Yes Yes Interface of tributary A (output/input) 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s 2MHz Use of tributary A as traffic tributary Yes No No
Value set as output of synchronism T12 (parameter Trib. B - Fig.53) NORMAL TRAFFIC T2 (2Mb/s) T3 (2MHz)
Output of Synchronism T12 on tributary B Yes * Yes Yes
Interface of tributary B (output/input) 2Mbit/s 2Mbit/s 2MHz
Use of tributary B as traffic tributary Yes No No
* For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic see pag.180).
179
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adaptive modulation (ACM).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B) The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 synchronism. If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation, in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example. Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.55).
Fig.55 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)
Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.43). b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.78) c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52). d. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see Fig.53).
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.43). b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.78) c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52). d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (Tributary A - value Enabled - Fig.54). e. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see Fig.53).
180
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n) Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic. If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following example. Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.56).
Fig.56 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.43). b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.78) c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Fig.52). d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 and Fig.52).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT: a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.43). b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.78) c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.51 e Fig.52). d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (Tributary 1 - value Enabled - Fig.54).
In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on more E1 tributaries, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all the tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source in input.
181
BASE BAND
At the choice of Base Band option, the program displays the following commands: Ethernet Switch (pag.183). It manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface. LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (pag.191). It manages the Ethernet external ports. Port A (pag.211). It manages the Ethernet internal port. Spanning Tree (pag.220). It manages the spanning tree in the network. TDM Tributaries (pag.227). It manages the TDM tributaries. Cross Connection (pag.251). It manages the cross-connection matrix.
The Cross Connection command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
182
Ethernet Switch
The Ethernet Switch command manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface. In detail, it is possible: General settings of the Ethernet switch To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table (pag.183). To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet (pag.185). To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field (pag.185) To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue (pag.185). To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its Tag 802.1p (pag.185). To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated (pag.186).
Parameters of PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) (pag.186).
Virtual LAN To verify the existing virtual Lans (pag.187). To create a virtual Lan (pag.189). To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan (pag.189). To delete a virtual Lan (pag.190).
To verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active. The MAC Addr. Aging Time parameter points out the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically acquired and stored in the specific table (see Fig.57). 2. To change the parameter, set the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
183
Fig.57 General tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.57 notes (1) Option: (2) 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames). 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048. 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
The option: 8421 WRR, indicates that a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority. Strict Priority, indicates that the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority. Strict 3, indicates that the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism. Strict 3 and 2, indicates that the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
(3)
The check sign indicates which output queue (Queue) the packet in input is associated to, whose value of priority Tag (802.1p) corresponds to the value 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. The 802.1p Priority Management table is COMMON to all the Ethernet port of the equipment.
(4)
Each Ethernet port of the equipment has four output queue, which the packets in input from other ports are sent to. Wording: Queue Queue Queue Queue 0. 1. 2. 3. Queue Queue Queue Queue with with with with 0 1 2 3 priority (lowest priority). priority. priority. priority (highest priority).
(5)
A packet in input from any Ethernet port of the equipment, having a valid value of priority Tag 802.1p, is automatically assigned to one of the four queues of the output port, according to what reported in the 802.1p Priority Management table. For example, with reference to the figures, the packets in input with Tag 802.1p equal to 0, 1, 2 or 3 will be assigned to the queue with lower priority (Queue 0), while the packets with Tag 802.1p equal to 4, 5, 6 or 7, to the output queue with highest priority (Queue 3). What just said is valid only if the analysis of the priority at level 3 (field PTOS/DSCP) is not active and prioritary. The equipment allows analysing the priority at level 2, according the standard 802.1p (values 07), or at level 3, through the analysis of the PTOS/DSCP field present in the header of the IP packets (values 063). The priority standard can be modified by the user and can be different for each Ethernet port.
184
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active. The Max Packet Size parameter points out the maximum size of the accepted packet (see Fig.57). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames). 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048. 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active. The QinQ ETH Type parameter points out the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field (see Fig.57). 2. To change the parameter, type the new value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active. The Egress Priority Policy parameter points out the emptying algorithm of the output queues (see Fig.57). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority. 8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority. Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism. Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its Tag 802.1p
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active. The 802.1p Priority Management table points out the current setting output queues - Tag 802.1p (see Fig.57). 2. To change the parameter, select the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to the wished combination output queue - Tag 802.1p. For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
185
To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is activated and deactivated
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the LLF tab. The LLF Hysteresis parameter points out the setting of the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding modality (see Fig.58). 3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. 4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.58 LLF tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
The setting of the parameter is common to all the Ethernet ports of the equipment. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the PTOS/DSCP Config tab. In the Queue Pri column, for each PTOS/DSCP value, the relevant output queue is displayed (see Fig.59). 3. To modify the output queue, which a value is associated to, select, in the Filter area, the option relevant to the IP format which the DSCP field refers to: IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv4 format. IPv6 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv6 format. Queue 0, to assign the value to the output queue with 0 priority (high priority). Queue 1, to assign the value to the output queue with 1 priority. Queue 2, to assign the value to the output queue with 2 priority. Queue 3, to assign the value to the output queue with 3 priority (low priority).
4. Select the output queue which the value is associated to:
5. Repeat the previous step for the output queue of all the wished value. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
186
Fig.59 PTOS/DSCP Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.59 notes (1) For each value of the column: Value. It is displayed the value expressed in binary digits. Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the wording present in these columns refer to RFC 2474, 2597 and 2598 (Request For Comments). Queue Pri. The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/DSCP has the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed: Queue 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority). Queue 1. Output queue with 1 priority. Queue 2. Output queue with 2 priority.
The single asterisk (*) near the wording indicates that the value has been modified but it is not yet transmitted to the equipment (pressing Apply). The output queue, which a value is associated to, can be modified by the user. (2) If set the option: View All. The list displays all the values. View Queue 0. The list displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue (low priority), (Queue Pri column, Queue 0 wording). View Queue 1. The list displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue (Queue Pri column, Queue 1 wording). View Queue 2. The list displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue (Queue Pri column, Queue 2 wording). View Queue 3. The list displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue (high priority), (Queue Pri column, Queue 3 wording).
To modify the displaying of the list, select the wished values. (3) If selected the option: VP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv4 format. IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the switch in the IPv6 format.
To verify the existing virtual LANs

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens.
187
2. Bring in front of page the Virtual Lan Config. tab. The existing virtual LANs are displayed in the Virtual Lan Config. tab (see Fig.60). Fig.60 Virtual Lan Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Fig.60 notes (1) For each virtual Lan, the columns indicate: VLan ID, identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation. The wording Used, indicates that the ID of the virtual Lan is used also as default Vlan ID by one of the internal/external ports (see Default Vlan ID area). Label, name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification. Lan1, enabling of the external port 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN: ----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. Untag, the port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port. Tagged, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information: Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself. Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag. Unmodif, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor added to the packets in output from the port.
Lan2, enabling of the external port 2 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1). Lan3, enabling of the external port 3 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1). Lan4, enabling of the external port 4 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1). PortA, enabling of the internal port to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1).
(2)
The default identifier of the internal (Port A) and external (Lan...) ports.
188
To create a virtual Lan

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Virtual Lan Config. tab. The Virtual Lan Config. tab opens (see Fig.60). 3. Select the Add tab. The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens. 4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 1 and 4095) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN. The parameter cannot be modified later. 5. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN. When the box is selected, Vlan <identifier> is suggested as name of the virtual Lan. This name can be changed as you wish. 6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A), select the option: Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port. Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information: Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself. Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag. Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor added to the packets in output from the port.
7. Press Add and confirm. The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Virtual Lan Config. tab. The Virtual Lan Config. tab opens (see Fig.60). 3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to modify. 4. Select the Modify tab. The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens. The VLan identifier cannot be changed. 5. Type the possible new name (alphanumeric string at most of 20 characters) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN in the Label box.
189
6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A), select the option: Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in output from the port. Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag composed by the information: Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself. Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag. Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed nor added to the packets in output from the port.
7. Press Apply and confirm. In the Virtual Lan Config. tab the changes to the row relevant to the specific virtual Lan are made.
To delete a virtual Lan

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command. The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Virtual Lan Config. tab. The Virtual Lan Config. tab opens (see Fig.60). 3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete. The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys. 4. Select the Remove tab. The Remove Item tab opens. 5. Press Remove Selected Item(s) and confirm. The virtual Lan is removed from the list.
190
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4

Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only Read and Write*, Station Operator, System
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). The LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 commands manage the Ethernet external port. On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <number relevant to the selected Lan> contextual area opens, where it is possible to manage the specific external port. In detail: Status and communication parameters To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.192). To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.194). To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.195). To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.195) To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.196) To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.196). Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.196) Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.196)
Interface type (electrical, optical) The following operation is available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4. To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) (pag.197)
Virtual Lan parameters To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.197). To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.199). To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.199). To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.200). To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.200).
Priority parameters To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.201). To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.202). To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.202)
191
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.202). To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204). To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204). To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) parameters To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204). To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.205). To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204). To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
LLF parameters To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.206).
Loop To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.207)
Laser parameters The following operations are available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical interfaces. To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.208) To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209) To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209) To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.209) To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.210) To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.210)
For more information about the: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225. Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring this tab in foreground. The Rate Control parameter points out the enabling status of the port (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use. Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port. ...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
192
Fig.61 Interface tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.61 notes (1) Operating modality of the line synchronism: Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock. Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
Parameter available and meaningful only for the ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto). (2) Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism: Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic. Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave Role is used.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex value Auto). (3) Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines: MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality). MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of external port is enabled (box Rate Control value Full Rate or ...Kb/...Mb). (4) Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table): (5) Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled. Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
Enabling status of the port: Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use. Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port. ...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
(6)
Activation status of the flow control of the port: Enable. The flow control is forced active. Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
193
Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto negotiation procedure). The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex box - option Auto).
(7)
Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modalities and transmission speed of the port. For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are available: Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s. Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s. Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled. Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
(8)
Connection parameters of the port. Box: Speed. Data transmission speed. Duplex. Transmission modality.
(9)
Current status of the line synchronism. Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex value Auto).
(10)
Status of the alarms relevant to the port. The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the external port is enabled (see pag.192). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. The Cable crossover parameter points out the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality). MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
194
To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. The Speed/Duplex parameter points out the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the wished option. For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are available: Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s. Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s. Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled. Full-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s. Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter points out the activation status of the flow control of the external port (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Enable. The flow control is forced active. Disable. The flow control is forced inactive. Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto negotiation procedure). The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex box - option Auto). 3. Press Apply and confirm. In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative. In Half-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.
195
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet switch is available only if enabled this function. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table) (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled. Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. Fig.61 shows an example. 2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm. The push-button is available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Control... box - option Auto).
To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active (see pag.195). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. The Master/Slave Role parameter points out the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the external port (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock. Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation is active (see pag.195). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN 3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground.
196
The M/S Autoneg. parameter points out the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism of the external port (see Fig.61). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is automatic. Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave Role is used.
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface Type tab active. The Interface Type parameter points out the interface type of the external port (see Fig.62). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface. Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.
3. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.62 Interface Type tab (Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.62 notes (1) Option: Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface. Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.63).
197
The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the switch. 3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095). 4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.63 VLan(802.1Q) tab (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.63 notes (1) Option: Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area. Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities: If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports enabled in the list for the same Tag. If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2)
Option: Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added nor removed to the packets in output from the port. Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information and VLAN identifier). Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box. Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is composed by: The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered in the equipment. The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the same port.
198
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type. (3) Check box: (4) Active ( ). The forcing is enabled. Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
For each single Ethernet port, if the set option is: Disable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are not enabled to transit through the specific internal or external port. Enable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are enabled to transit through the specific internal or external port
The LAN box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the port (see Fig.63). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area. Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities: If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports enabled in the list for the same Tag. If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the option Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see pag.200). 4. Press Apply and confirm. If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (see Fig.63). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added nor removed to the packets in output from the port.
199
Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information and VLAN identifier). Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box. Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is composed by: The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered in the equipment. The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the same port. The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the external port to the default value is active (see Fig.63). 3. To change the parameter: Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing. Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The enabling status of the ports through which can transit the message in input from the external port, which the window refers to, is displayed in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.63). The LAN box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed. 3. To change the parameters, set the option: Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to, to transit through the specific internal or external port. Enable, to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to, to transit through the specific internal or external port.
200
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the external port, to the output (see Fig.64). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable, to disable the priority management. 802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3). 802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for the choice of the output queue.
4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.64 Priority Selection tab (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.64 notes (1) Option: Disable. The priority is disabled. 802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3). 802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of TOS for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority for the choice of the output queue.
(2)
Option: 0. Lowest priority 7. Highest priority.
(3)
The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value. The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign.
201
For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from the switch with priority 5. The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.64). 3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.64) is active. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.64). 3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to the wished combination values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the Switch. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab. In the tab are displayed the external port parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol (see Fig.65).
202
Fig.65 STP/... tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.65 notes (1) Parameter: Role. Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a bridge/switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the bridge in the network: Disable. Port disabled. Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the bridge selected as root. Each bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status. Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status. Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status. Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status. Port status port-disable port-blocking port-learning port-forwarding (2) Value: Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1). Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2). Enable-Protection1 - Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The ethernet line protection (see Fig.66) is enabled. Receive Forward Update the Receive/proc- Re-transmit traffic traffic Address Table Unit ess BPDU BPDU No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No No Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes
Status. Status of the port:
Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol: rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time). stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
(3)
Value: 0. Highest priority 15. Lowest priority
203
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab. The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected port (see Fig.65). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1). Enable-Bridge2. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2). Enable-Protection1 - Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The ethernet line protection (see Fig.66) is enabled.
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab. The Priority parameter points out the priority of the external port (see Fig.65/Fig.66). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (STP/ELP)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab. The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the external port. (see Fig.65/Fig.66). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference of a port with respect to the others. This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port 3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box. It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in the Standard IEEE 802.1w. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab. In the tab are displayed the external port parameters (see Fig.66).
204
Fig.66 .../ELP tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.66 notes (1) Parameter: Role. Role assigned by the ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port: Alternate. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status. Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status. Port status port-blocking port-forwarding (2) Value: Disable. Ethernet line protection disabled. Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (see Fig.65). Enable-Protection1. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the considered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is EnableProtection1. Enable-Protection2. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the considered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is EnableProtection2. Receive Forward Update the traffic traffic Address Table Unit No Yes No Yes No Yes Receive/process BPDU Yes Yes Re-transmit BPDU No Yes
Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.
(3)
Value: 0. Highest priority. 15. Lowest priority.
To enable/disable the ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP/ELP tab.
205
The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of ethernet line protection for the selected port (see Fig.66). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: Disable. Ethernet line protection disabled. Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (see Fig.65). Enable-Protection1. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the considered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-Protection1. Enable-Protection2. The ethernet line protection (proprietary) is enabled between the considered external port and the other external port(s) whose parameter value is Enable-Protection2.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the LLF tab. The LLF parameter points out the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality (see Fig.67). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The LLF modality is disabled. Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms. Rem. LAN-1. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 1 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-2. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 2 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-3. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 3 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-4. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 4 port associated to it.
Only if the Local option is selected, it is possible to activate one or more of the following options:
Fig.67 LLF tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
206
Fig.67 notes (1) Option: Disable. The LLF modality is disabled. Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms. Rem. LAN-1, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 1 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-2, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 2 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-3, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 3 port associated to it. Rem. LAN-4, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 4 port associated to it.
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Line Loop tab. The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the port (see Fig.68). 3. To change the parameter, select the loop. The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated and vice versa). 4. Press Apply. Only if you are activating the loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting. Fig.68 Line Loop tab (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3, Lan 4) (LAN... contextual area)
207
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Trasmitter Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69). Fig.69 Laser Control tab (Lan3, Lan 4 - optical interface) (LAN... contextual area)
Fig.69 notes (1) Wording: (2) Value: optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber). optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength). optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength). Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the laser module). Status On. The laser is on transmission. Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3. (3) If active, the option: (4) On. The laser is enabled for transmission. Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
If active, the option: Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal. Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit. In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on. Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
208
(5)
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto). Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser during the testing operation.
(6)
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.69).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: On. The laser is enabled for transmission. Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
4. Press Apply. Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.69). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal. Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit. In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
209
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between 60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm. Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator. Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply. Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab (see Fig.69). 3. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Manual option. 4. Press Apply. A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 5. Confirm the operation. The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm. 6. Press Restart and confirm. The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.
To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command. The LAN <port number> contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab (see Fig.69). 3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser. To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.). 4. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Test option. 5. Press Apply. A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 6. Confirm the operation. The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm. 7. Press Restart and confirm. The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
210
Port A
The Port A command manages the Ethernet internal port. In detail, it is possible: Status and communication parameters To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port (pag.211) To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for the internal port (pag.212)
Virtual Lan parameters To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port (pag.212) To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port (pag.214) To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output (pag.214) To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value (pag.215) To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port (pag.215)
Priority parameters To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue (pag.215) To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to (pag.216) To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port) (pag.217)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.217) To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port (pag.218) To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (pag.219) To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (pag.219)
For more information about the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active. The Port parameter points out the enabling status of the internal port (see Fig.70). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use. Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.
211
Fig.70 Interface tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.70 notes (1) Option: (2) Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use. Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.
Option: Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled. Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for the internal port
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet switch is available only if enabled this function. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active. The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table (MAC Table) (see Fig.70). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled. Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.71). The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the switch. 3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
212
Fig.71 VLan(802.1Q) tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.71 notes (1) Option: Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag of the packets in input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area. Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities: If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports enabled in the list for the same Tag. If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2)
Option: Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added nor removed to the packets in output from the port. Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information and VLAN identifier). Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box. Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is composed by: The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered in the equipment. The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the same port. The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type. (3) Check-box: Active ( ). The forcing is enabled. Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
213
(4)
For each single Ethernet port, if the set: Disable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are not enabled to transit through the specific external port. Enable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are enabled to transit through the specific external port
The Port A box is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the port (see Fig.71). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input. They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area. Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities: If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports enabled in the list for the same Tag. If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the value Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on Tag base (see pag.215). 4. Press Apply and confirm. If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag 802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output (see Fig.71). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added nor removed to the packets in output from the port. Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information and VLAN identifier). Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box. Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is composed by: The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered in the equipment.
214
The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the packets in input to the same port. The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the internal port to the default value is active (see Fig.71). 3. To change the parameter: Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing. Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the VLan(802.1Q) tab. The enabling status of the ports, through which can transit the messages in input from the internal port, is pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.71). The Port A box is not displayed. 3. To change the parameters, set the value: Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific external port. Enable, to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific external port.
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the internal port, to the output (see Fig.71). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable, to disable the priority management. 802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue.
215
IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3). 802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for the choice of the output queue.
4. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.72 Priority Selection tab (Port A contextual area)
Fig.72 notes (1) Option: Disable. The priority is disabled. 802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3). 802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of TOS for the choice of the output queue. IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p priority for the choice of the output queue.
(2)
Option: 0. Lowest priority 7. Highest priority.
(3)
The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch with a different priority value. The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign. For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from the switch with priority 5. The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens.
216
2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.72). 3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.72) is active. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Priority Selection tab. If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.72). 3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to the wished combination values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from the Switch. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP tab. In the tab are pointed out the parameters of the internal port relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol (see Fig.73).
Fig.73 STP tab (Port A contextual area)
217
Fig.73 notes (1) Parameter: Role. Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a bridge/switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the bridge in the network: Disable. Port disabled. Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the bridge selected as root. Each bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status. Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status. Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status. Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status. Port status port-disable port-blocking port-learning port-forwarding (2) Value: (3) Value: 0. Highest priority. 15. Lowest priority. Disable. STP protocol disabled Enable-Bridge1. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1) Enable-Bridge2. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2) Receive Forward Update the traffic traffic Address Table Unit No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Receive/process BPDU No Yes Yes Yes Re-transmit BPDU No No Yes Yes
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP tab. The STP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected port (see Fig.73). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: Disable. Protocol disabled Enable-Bridge1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1) Enable-Bridge2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2)
218
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP tab. The Priority parameter points out the priority of the internal port (see Fig.73). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command. The Port A contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the STP tab. The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the internal port (see Fig.73). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the preference of a port with respect to the others. This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port 3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box. It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in the Standard IEEE 802.1w. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
219
Spanning Tree
The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of the Spanning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself. The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network In detail, it is possible:
:
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.220) To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time) (pag.221) To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval (pag.221) To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age) (pag.222) To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.222) To verify the MAC Address of a bridge (pag.223) To verify/modify the priority of a bridge (pag.224)
Moreover, if for one or more external ports (LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4) the Spanning Tree protocol is not active, but the Ethernet line protection is active, by means of the Spanning Tree command it is possible: To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection (pag.224)
For more information about the: Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.225. Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) go to pag.225.
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. The Force Version parameter points out the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to use (see Fig.74). 2. To change the parameter, select the value: rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time). stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
220
Fig.74 Setting tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.74 notes (1) Value: rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time). stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. The Hello Time parameter points out the time interval that passes between two consecutive transmissions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree function enabled (see Fig.74). 2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 2sec. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. The Forward Delay parameter points out the time interval which passes between the passage between the port-blocking status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the port-forwarding status of the port (see Fig.74). 2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 15 sec. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
221
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. The Max Age parameter points out the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass through before expiring. The passage from a switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second per equipment (see Fig.74). 2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 20 sec. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Summary tab. In the Summary area for each Ethernet port, are pointed out the parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol (see Fig.75). Fig.75 Summary tab (STP) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.75 notes (1) Parameter: LAN.../Port 1. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol of the specific port: Disable. Protocol disabled. Bridge 1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1). Bridge 2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).
Role. Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a bridge/switch. The role defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the bridge in the network: Disable. Port disabled. Root. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the bridge selected as root. Each bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status. Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status.
222
Designated. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status. Backup. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status. Port status port-disable port-blocking port-learning port-forwarding Receive Forward Update the traffic traffic Address Table Unit No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Receive/process BPDU No Yes Yes Yes Re-transmit BPDU No No Yes Yes
To verify the MAC Address of a bridge

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens. 2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2. The MAC Address parameter points out the physical address of the specific bridge. Fig.76 shown an example. Fig.76 Bridge... tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.76 notes (1) Value: 0. Maximum priority. 15. Minimum priority.
223
To verify/modify the priority of a bridge

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens. 2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2. The Priority parameter points out the priority of the bridge to use in the auto negotiation of the root: 0 (maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority). If two bridges have the same priority, the bridge with lower MAC Address is chosen as root. Fig.76 shown an example. 3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the ethernet line protection
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command. The Spanning Tree contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Summary tab. In the Summary area for each external port, is pointed out the status (see Fig.77). Fig.77 Summary tab (ELP) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Fig.77 notes (1) Parameter: LAN.... Enabling status of the ethernet line protection of the specific port: Disable. Ethernet line protection disabled. Prot1. Ethernet line protection enabled (Protection1). Prot2. Ethernet line protection enabled (Protection2).
Role. Role assigned by the ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behaviour of the port: Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking status. Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.
224
Status. Status of the port: Port status port-blocking port-forwarding Receive Forward Update the traffic traffic Address Table Unit No Yes No Yes No Yes Receive/process BPDU Yes Yes Re-transmit BPDU No Yes
Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info)

Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity. The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a complex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status (Blocked). If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path. For more information, refer to the standard IEEE: 802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol). 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info)

The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level (Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports. When the user enables the ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled. The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again. The ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of the LAN connection. The parameters, which determine which LAN port among those in protection must be set as operating, are the port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol: 1. Priority A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port. When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest priority value. Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The port LAN 1 is enabled, has a valid signal and priority 1, the port LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and priority 2, the port LAN 3 is enabled, has a valid signal and priority 3. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport. 2. Cost A connection cost can be assigned to every port. When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the same priority, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost. Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The ports are all enabled, have a valid signal and priority 1. The port LAN 1 has cost 200.000, the port LAN 2 has cost 250.000, the port LAN 3 has cost 300.000. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport.
225
3. Logic position Every port is assigned a logic position (1 4). When the ELP function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the same priority and the same cost, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest logic position. Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP function is enabled. The ports are all enabled, have a valid signal, priority 1 and cost 200.000. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport. The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have been used to represent in WEB LCT the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch: LAN port Operating Reserve Rule Designated Alternate Port status Forwarding Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following operations: To enable/disable the use of the LAN ports (parameter Rate Control - Fig.61) To enable/disable the ethernet line protection on the ports you wish to protect (parameter STP/ ELP - Fig.66). It is possible to protect two, three or four ports or protect the ports in pairs. In detail, in the first case the ELP function (Enable-Protection1) will be enabled for the two, three or four LAN ports. In the second case, the ELP function (Enable-Protection1) will be enabled for two ports and the ELP 2 function (Enable-Protection2) will be enabled for the other two ports. To set the port priority (parameter Priority - Fig.66) To set the port cost (parameter Path Cost - Fig.66)
226
TDM Tributaries
At the choice of TDM Tributaries option, the program displays the following commands: E1 (pag.228). It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries. STM-1 (pag.231). It manages the 2STM-1 tributary. VC-4 (pag.240). It manages the VC4 virtual container. VC-12 (pag.245). It manages VC12 virtual container.
The STM-1, VC-4 and VC-12 commands are available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43).
227
E1
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary. In detail, it is possible: To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status (pag.228) To verify/modify the label of a tributary (pag.229) To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use (pag.229) To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops (pag.230)
To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command. The E1 contextual area opens, where the status of the tributaries, of the loops and of the alarms is pointed out (see Fig.78). Fig.78 E1 contextual area
Fig.78 notes (1) Symbol: . The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the LOS Inv box (see next note). . The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the alarms.
If the symbol relevant to tributary A and/or B is not available (grey symbol), this means that the tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in input and/or output (see pag.167).
228
(2)
If the box is: The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is not raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected. The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/ s signal is however connected.
To verify the status of the LOS Inv box, it is sufficient to move the cursor of the mouse on the box which points out the summary alarm status. A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv box (the figure shows an example). The status of the LOS Inv box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used. (3) The colour of box points out the status of the alarm: White. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
To verify the alarm detail, it is sufficient to move the cursor of the mouse on the box. A dynamic window is displayed, where the status of each single alarm is displayed (the figure displays an example). (4) Symbol: (5) . The line loop is active. . The internal loop is active. . The loop is not active. to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs
In detail, use the keys
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
To verify/modify the label of a tributary 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command. The E1 contextual area opens, where the label of each single tributary is pointed out (see Fig.78). 2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the label itself. A dynamic window is displayed. 3. Type an alphanumeric string of maximum 40 characters. 4. Press Ok. 5. Press Apply and confirm.
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use Operation not available for the tributaries A and/or B if already used for the T12 synchronism in output (see pag.167). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command. The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.78). 2. Select the tributary to be enabled (or disabled). The tributary assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it becomes disabled and vice versa). If the tributary is enabled and you wish to disabled it, at the selection tributary the message Do you want LOS inversion enable? is displayed. Pressing: Ok, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
229
No, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
When the tributary is disabled the management status of LOS alarm can be modified in the following way. Move the cursor of the mouse over the box which points out the summary alarm status of the tributary for which you wish to verify or modify the management of LOS alarm. A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv box. If the box is: the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected. the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
Select the box to enable or disable the alarm management. Each time is selected, the box assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa). 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command. The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.78). 2. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated). The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated and vice versa). The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already enabled. 3. Press Apply. If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing a forcing and the current setting of the timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivated. If the Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the user profile in use can enable the tributary.
230
STM-1
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). At the choice of STM-1 option, the program displays the following commands: Lim A STM-1 [x] (pag.232). It manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream.
The x value points out the STM-1 stream which the command is referred to (1, 2).
231
Lim A STM-1 [x] Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only Read and Write*, Station Operator, System
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The command relevant to the STM-1 2 stream (Lim A STM-1 [2]) is available only if the protection of STM1 stream (MSP mode) is active. The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream. In detail, it is possible: To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream (pag.232) To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side) (pag.234) To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (pag.234) To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier (pag.234) To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms (pag.235) To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.235) To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (pag.236)
The following operations are available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. To verify the current status of the laser (pag.236) To verify the type of laser module (pag.237) To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (pag.237) To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (pag.238) To enable manually the laser transmission (pag.238) To execute the test laser functioning status (pag.239)
The x value points out the STM-1 stream which the command is referred to (1, 2).
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 stream is pointed out (see Fig.79). 2. To change the status of the STM-1 stream, select the symbol that represents the stream. The symbol assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive and vice versa). 3. Press Apply and confirm.
232
Fig.79 Settings tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.79 notes (1) Symbol: (2) Symbol: . The STM-1 stream is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however connected. . The STM-1 stream is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit the alarms. . The STM-1 loop on line side is active. . The STM-1 loop on inner side is active. . The loop is inactive.
(3)
The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
(4)
If active, the option: Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled. 1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm). 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(5)
Box: Sent Trace. Transmitted sequence of the control characters. Expected Trace. Character sequence to be controlled at reception. Received Trace. Character sequence in reception.
233
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side) Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 loops on line side and inner side is pointed out (see Fig.79). 2. To change the parameter, select the loop. The loop assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive and vice versa). The STM-1 loops on line side and on inner side cannot be activated at the same time. 3. Press Apply. Only if you are activating a loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. Into the Trace Type area the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out (see Fig.79). 2. To change the parameter, select the value: Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled. 1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm). 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. Into the J0 Trace Identifier area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception relevant to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out (see Fig.79). 2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box: Sent Trace, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters. Expected Trace, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option pushbutton into the Trace Type area (1 or 16 bytes). 3. Press Apply and confirm.
234
To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active. In the Loop And Alarms area, the status of the STM-1 stream alarms is displayed (see Fig.79).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Thresholds tab. The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.80). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated. E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated. E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.
4. Press Apply and then confirm. Fig.80 Thresholds tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.80 notes (1) If active, the option: (2) E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated. E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated. E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.
If active, the option: E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated. E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated. E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
235
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Thresholds tab. The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.80). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated. E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated. E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
To verify the current status of the laser Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Laser Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.81). Fig.81 Laser Control tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Fig.81 notes (1) Wording: (2) Value: optical-S11. S type laser module (application: Inter office-Short-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.). Status On. The laser is on transmission. Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
236
optical-L11. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.). optical-L12. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1), 2 (fibber type: according to G.652, G.654 Specifications). optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1). Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly of the laser module).
Classification of the optical interface according to G.957 Specification. (3) If active, the option: (4) On. The laser is enabled for transmission. Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
If active, the option: Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal. Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit. In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on. Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator. If the management of STM-1 stream in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active (see Fig.43), the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown area, the value Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area are not available.
(5)
Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller before trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto). Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser during the testing operation.
(6)
To verify the type of laser module Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.81).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Laser Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.81).
237
3. To change the parameter, select the option: On. The laser is enabled for transmission. Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.
4. Press Apply. Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab. In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is displayed (see Fig.81). If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to Disable. In this case, the change operation here below is not available. 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real presence of the optical signal. Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit. In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on. To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between 60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Press Apply and confirm. Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator. Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply. Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the transmission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to Disable. In this case, this operation is not available.
238
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab (see Fig.81). 3. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Manual option. 4. Press Apply. A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 5. Confirm the operation. The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm. 6. Press Restart and confirm. The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.
To execute the test laser functioning status Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface. Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.43), the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled (laser transmission modality is forced to Disable). In this case, this operation is not available.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] command. The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Laser Control tab (see Fig.81). 3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser. To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.). 4. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Test option. 5. Press Apply. A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 6. Confirm the operation. The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm. 7. Press Restart and confirm. The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
239
VC-4
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). At the choice of VC-4 option, the program displays the following commands: Lim A VC-4 (pag.241). It manages the VC4 virtual container configuration.
240
Lim A VC-4 Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator, System
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The Lim A VC-4 command manages the VC4 virtual container configuration. In detail, it is possible: To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (pag.241) To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier (pag.242) To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms (pag.242) To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.242) To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (pag.243) To verify/modify the Signal Label value (pag.244)
To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the j1/Alarms tab active. The Trace Type parameter points out the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control of the received signal (see Fig.82). 2. To change the parameter, select the value: Disable. The control of the J1 byte is disabled. 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
3. Press Apply and confirm. Fig.82 J1/Alarms tab (Lim A VC-4 contextual area)
241
Fig.82 notes (1) If active, the option: Disable. The control of the J1 byte is disabled. 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(2)
Box: Sent Trace. Transmitted sequence of the control characters. Expected Trace. Character sequence to be controlled at reception. Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception.
(3)
The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the J1/Alarms tab active. In the tab the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1, used for the control of the received signal, is pointed out (see Fig.82). 2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box: Sent Trace, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters. Expected Trace, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens with the J1/Alarms tab active. In the Alarms area the status of the VC-4 alarms is pointed out (see Fig.82).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the B3/Signal Label tab. The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.83). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated. E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated. E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.
242
Fig.83 B3/Signal Label tab (Lim A VC-4 contextual area)
Fig.83 notes (1) If active, the option: (2) E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated. E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated. E-9, at the detection of a BER > 10E-9 the alarm is activated.
(3)
Box: Sent Label. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to. Expected Label. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to. Received Signal Label. Specification which the received signal refers to.
The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the B3/Signal Label tab. The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.83). 3. To change the parameter, select the value: E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated. E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated. E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
243
To verify/modify the Signal Label value 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 command. The Lim A VC-4 contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the B3/Signal Label tab. In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the received signal is displayed (see Fig.83). The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm). 3. To modify the parameter, set in the box: Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to. Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.
The specifications, which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure. 4. Press Apply and then confirm.
244
VC-12
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). At the choice of VC-12 option, the program displays the following commands: VC-12 Thresholds (pag.246). It manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms. Lim A VC-12 (pag.248). It manages the configuration parameters of each VC-12 channel.
245
VC-12 Thresholds Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator, System
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms. In detail, it is possible: To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.246) To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (pag.247)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds command. The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens. The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (see Fig.84). 2. To change the parameter, select the value: E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated. E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.
3. Press Apply and then confirm. Fig.84 VC-12 Thresholds contextual area
Fig.84 notes (1) If active, the option: E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated. E-6, at the detection of a BER > 10E-6 the alarm is activated.
246
(2)
E-7, at the detection of a BER > 10E-7 the alarm is activated. E-8, at the detection of a BER > 10E-8 the alarm is activated.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds command. The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens. The Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (see Fig.84). 2. To change the parameter, select the value: E-3, at the detection of a BER > 10E-3 the alarm is activated. E-4, at the detection of a BER > 10E-4 the alarm is activated. E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
247
Lim A VC-12 Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write Station Operator, System
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.43). The Lim A VC-12 command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel. In detail, it is possible: To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 (pag.248) To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of a VC-12 (pag.249) To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 (pag.249) To verify the alarms status of a VC-12 (pag.250)
To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 command. The Lim A VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.85). 2. Select the wished VC-12 channel. If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12. The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens. The enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal is pointed out in the J2 Trace Identifier area. If the active option is: Disable. The control of the byte C2 is disabled. Enable. The control of the byte C2 is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value. 4. Press Apply and then confirm. Fig.85 TUG-3 x tab (Lim A VC-12 contextual area)
248
Fig.85 notes (1) Each VC-12 channel is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the box. The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to. The total status of the channel is displayed by the color of the box: Grey. No alarm is active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. At least one alarm of channel is active and it has severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning. If there are more alarms with different severity, the color of the box will point out the most serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier of a VC-12 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 command. The Lim A VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.85). 2. Select the wished VC-12 channel. If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12. The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens. In the J2 Trace Identifier area, the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal. In detail, the box: Expected Trace. Character sequence to be controlled at reception. Sent Trace. Transmitted sequence of the control characters. Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception. Sent Trace, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters. Expected Trace, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
3. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 command. The Lim A VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.85). 2. Select the wished VC-12 channel. If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12. The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens. In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the received signal is displayed. In detail, the box: Sent Label. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to. Expected Label. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm). 3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent Label and Expected Label box the new specification. The specifications which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous. 4. Press Apply and then confirm.
249
To verify the alarms status of a VC-12 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 command. The Lim A VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.85). 2. Select the wished VC-12 channel. If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12. The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens. In the Alarms area, for each alarm of the Vc12 channel, there is a box containing the alarm name. The color of the box indicates the alarm status: Grey. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has severity, respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
250
Cross Connection
This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix. In detail, it is possible: To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format (pag.251) To display the connections of the equipment in table format (pag.257) To execute a Tributary-Radio connection (pag.258) To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (pag.258) To delete one or more connections (pag.259) To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (pag.259) To disable an Auto-Loop (pag.260) To verify/modify the connection label (pag.260) To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) (pag.261)
For more information about the cross connection matrix go to pag.261.
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format

It is possible to display only one connection at a time. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens where the existing connections are displayed. 3. To display a connection, point with the mouse or select a channel used for the connection you wish to verify. If are highlighted: A tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and an E1 radio connected by a blue line, the connection is of type Tributary-Radio. Two different tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) connected by a blue line, the connection is of type Tributary-Tributary. The same tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS/E1 radio) with a blue line linking the channel itself, the connection is of Auto-Loop type.
Fig.87 shows an example.
251
Fig.86 Matrix tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
252
Fig.87 Cross Connection Manager window
253
Fig.87 notes (1) This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment and grouped by membership streams. Every channel is represented by a box. For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box. For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12. The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 3). The currently selected channel is represented by the yellow box. The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the View area (see note 2). When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported. A connection is named on its creation by means of a default name composed by the names of the channels composing the connection separated by /. The default name can be modified by the user. (2) The parameters present in the View area determine the streams displayed in the channels area. If the selected option is: Tributary-Radio. The channels area contains: The radio stream subdivided in the group of high priority E1 channels (Radio Permanent E1 (<radio branch label>) and the group of low priority E1 channels (Radio Extra E1 (<radio branch label>). The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined by the user (seeFig.47). Only one stream among the available ones. The right part of the View area displays the parameter Tributary which is used to modify the tributary stream present in the channels area. Selecting the arrow of the Tributary box, the list of the available streams is displayed. Selecting a value, the central part of the channels area changes displaying the detail of the channel for the selected tributary. Tributary-Tributary. The channels area contains two different tributary streams. The top part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 1st Trib. The bottom part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 2nd Trib. In order to display a different tributary, select the arrow of the box 1st Trib or 2nd Trib and select a value from the list. The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other box Trib. The boxes 1st Trib and 2nd Trib are displayed in the right part of the View area instead of the parameter Tributary when the Tributary-Tributary option is selected. In the boxes Tributary, 1st Trib and 2nd Trib the following values can be present: Expansion 16xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1). Expansion 32xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1). Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channels of STM-1 streams. NBUS.... E1 channels of Nodal Bus. The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration.The detail is pointed out in Tab.6.
The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.5. If the user moves the mouse pointer over a channel used for a connection and at least one of the (radio/tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the cross-connection window, the View area dynamically displays the connections existing between the channels and the type of connection. Here below an example is reported.
254
(3)
The key points out the colours that determines the status of the channels: Dark green (Auto loop req.). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet (Auto-Loop requested). Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real Auto-Loop). Light green (Unlinked). The channel is not used. Purple (Link requested). The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested). Light blue (Linked). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio connection executed on the equipment (real connection). Grey (Linked to Trib. A/B). The channel is used for the pre-configured connection with the Tributary A (box A) or tributary B (box B). The pre-configured connections cannot be modified or deleted.
(4)
Push-button: Refresh. It forces the reading of the data from the equipment. If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing: Ok. The data present in the window are updated and all the changes made to the connections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost. No. The data present in the window are not updated.
Apply. It makes the changes operating. When it is selected, a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing: Ok. All the changes made on the cross-connection matrix are communicated to the controller. No. The operation is not executed.
(5)
Help. It opens the help on-line.
This area is available and meaningful only if the equipment ALCplus2 IDU with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected nodal configuration composed by AL IDU plus equipment (parameter Nodal Configuration: AlPlus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Protection: Protected - see Fig.43). In this condition, the user can select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, to which element of the node transmit in preferential mode the E1 channel (protected NBUS) cross-connected with another channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS protected/E1 radio).
255
The key shows the colours determining the status of only the channels involved in this type of connections: Dark orange (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the first nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply pushbutton) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection). Light orange (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected NBUS channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The connection is sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the first nodal element. Bright yellow (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the second nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply pushbutton) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection). Yellow (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected NBUS channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The connection is sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the second nodal element.
The labels of the elements (To IDU...) in the Preferential Nodal Link area and in the key below change depending on how the nodal element, which the user is connected to, has been defined: Node A, Node B or Node C (parameter Nodal ID - see Fig.43). Here below an example is reported.
256
To display the connections of the equipment in table format

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Bring in front of page the List tab. The tab displays the existing connections. Fig.88 shown an example. If the List tab is not available, the list is empty. Fig.88 List tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
Fig.88 notes (1) Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column: Name. Name of the connection. On the creation of the connection, a default name is assigned which can be modified later by the user. The format of the default name is the following: <Channel> / <Linked Ch.> The values which Channel and Linked Ch. can assume are the same listed in the next paragraph. Channel and Linked Ch. Channels composing the connection: Exp.16xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1). Exp.32xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1). Exp. STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1 stream. NBUS... <E1 number>. E1 channel of Nodal Bus. The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration. The detail is pointed out in Tab.6. Radio Perm. E1 <E1 number>. High priority radio E1 channel. Radio Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority radio E1 channel.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direction of the connection (Channel -> Linked Ch.) only for clarity of explanation. Type. Type of connection: Standard. Connection of Tributary-Tributary, Tributary-Radio or Auto-Loop (loop of a tributary channel on itself) type. Pass-Through. Connection of Auto-Loop type (loop of a radio channel on itself).
The list does not points out the pre-configured connections.
257
(2)
When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow is displayed. On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow is displayed) an so on.
(3)
Push-button: Select All. It selects all the connections present in the list. Deselect All. It deselects all the connections present in the list. Delete Selected. It deletes the selected connections.
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection

All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connections where a protected NBUS channel is involved. In this case, when the user executes a single connection, the matrix automatically executes the protection connections creating, as fact, a protected connection. The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 in protected nodal configuration. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Select the Tributary-Radio option. 4. Set, in the Tributary box, the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection. 5. Select the unused channel on tributary side (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and drag-and-drop it on the unused channel on radio side (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1) The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. To modify the name of the connection go to pag.260. The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.5). 6. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection

All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connections where a protected NBUS channel is involved. In this case, when the user executes a single connection, the matrix automatically executes the protection connections creating, as fact, a protected connection. The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 in protected nodal configuration. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Select the Tributary-Tributary option. 4. Set, in the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib box, the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection. The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other Trib box. 5. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
258
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary. The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. To modify the name of the connection go to pag.260. The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.5). 6. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To delete one or more connections

To delete one or more Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connections (Cross Connection Manager window) 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Select a channel of the Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connection you wish to delete and drag-and-drop it over the trash icon. The connection is deleted. 4. Repeat the step 3 to delete all the wished connections. 5. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix. To delete an Auto-Loop in the Cross Connection Manager window, use the procedure To disable an Auto-Loop (pag.260).
To delete one or more connections (List tab) 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Bring in front of page the List tab (see Fig.88). 3. Select ( ) the connections you wish to delete. Press Select All to select all the connections present in the window. 4. Press Delete Selected and confirm.
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Double click on the unused tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or radio channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) for which you wish to execute the auto-loop. The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed. 4. Select the Enabled option. 5. Press Ok.
259
A blue line, which closes in loop on the selected channel, and the name assigned by default to the connection are displayed. To modify the name of the connection go to pag.260. 6. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To disable an Auto-Loop
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Double click on the on the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the radio channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you wish to disable the auto-loop. The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed. 4. Select the Disabled option. 5. Press Ok. The channel changes from used to free (light green box). 6. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To verify/modify the connection label

To verify/ modify the name of a connection (Cross Connection Manager window) 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Select one of the channels that form the connection. The connection line is displayed and, next to it, its name in a yellow rectangle (see Fig.87). 4. To modify the name of the connection, select the rectangle. The Cross Connection Label window opens. The parameters Current Value and New Value point out the current name of the connection. 5. Set the new name in the New Value field: alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify the name of the connections (List tab) 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Bring in front of page the List tab. The column Name displays, for each connection, the relevant name (see Fig.88).
260
To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected)

Operation available and meaningful only if the equipment ALCplus2 IDU with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected nodal configuration composed by AL IDU plus equipment (parameter Nodal Configuration: AlPlus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Protection: Protected see Fig.43). In this particular configuration, for the connections involving a NBUS channel (single connections which are automatically protected by the matrix - see pag.261) it is necessary to set the element of the node which you wish to send the connection to in preferential mode. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command. The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.86). 2. Press Configuration. The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.87). 3. Select the Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio option. 4. Set the NBUS stream and the tributary or the Radio stream you wish to use for the connection setting the parameters present in the View area. 5. Select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, the element of the node (option To IDU...) which you wish to send the connection to in preferential mode. 6. Select the unused NBUS tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary/radio channel. The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is displayed. To modify the name of the connection go to pag.260. 7. Press Apply and confirm. The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
Cross connection matrix (more info)

For ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM1 16E1, a TDM matrix is available for the cross-connection of the E1 channels. The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and on the equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.5.
Connection Type The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection: Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/ E1 NBUS) and a radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1). Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS). Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a radio E1 channel (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1) on itself.
The TDM matrix can manage single and protected connections. All the connections executed by the user are single connections. Only exceptions are the connections (Tributary-Radio, Tributary-Tributary) involving a protected NBUS channel. In this case, when the user executes a single connection, the matrix automatically executes the protection connections creating, as fact, a protected connection. The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 in protected nodal configuration.
261
Display of the cross-connections The user can display the cross-connections existing in an equipment as graphic or as table. In the first case, the tributary and radio streams are graphically displayed in a window (Cross Connection Manager window). When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection (see Fig.87). In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (List tab). Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type are pointed out (see Fig.88). Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays: GRAPHICAL display (Cross Connection Manager window): To verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time) To execute a Tributary-Radio connection To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection To delete one or more connections To enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop) To disable an Auto-Loop To verify/modify the name of a connection To verify the connections of the equipment To delete one or more connections at the same time To verify/modify the name of the connections
TABLE display (List tab):
Creation of a cross-connection All the cross-connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see pag.258, pag.258, pag.259). It is possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Cross Connection Manager window Fig.87). Manual deletion of the cross-connections It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from the table display (see pag.259). In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other type. Automatic deletion of the cross-connections The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or radio) stream, object of the change, is terminated: STM-1 stream Passage of the STM-1 stream (STM-1 MST Mode) from the status 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS to the None status (see Fig.43). Nodal Bus (1, 2 and protected) Passage of the Nodal Configuration: From one of the statuses (Al...) to the status No Nodal (see Fig.43). From the status AlcPlus2 (not protected) to the status AlcPlus2 (protected) and vice versa (see Fig.43)
E1 Radio - Permanent All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the number of high priority E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) (see Fig.44).
E1 Radio - Extra All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the maximum number of low priority E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.44). All the operations, executed in the tab Extra TDM Priority, which change the order used to discard the dynamic E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) from the adaptive modulation (see Fig.47).
262
Tab.5 Ports of the cross-connection matrix

*
Equipment ALCplus2 IDU IduBoard IduBoard Exp. 16E1
Ports of the cross-connection matrix Port Stream Configuration Availability
The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix Expansion 32xE1 E1 tributaries of 32 E1 channels the expansion Always available Port/channels available when the management of STM-1 stream is active (parameter STM-1 MST Mode, values 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS - see Fig.43)
Expansion STM-1 IduBoard Exp 2xSTM-1 32E1 (1)
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
Radio Permanent E1 (Radio-A)
x E1 Radio Port/channels available when the (high priority E1 x = Value of the parameter Pervalue x is greater than 0 channels) manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.44). y E1 Radio (low priority E1 channels) y = Value of the parameter Extra TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1 (see Fig.44) (2).
Radio Extra E1 (Radio-A)
Port/channels available when the value y is greater than 0
Expansion 16xE1
E1 tributaries of 16 E1 channels the expansion
Always available Port/channels available when the management of STM-1 stream is active (parameter STM-1 MST Mode, values 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS - see Fig.43)
Expansion STM-1
STM-1
63 VC-12 channels
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 (1)
NBUS... Radio Permanent E1 (Radio-A)
Nodal Bus
The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment nodal configuration. The detail is pointed out in Tab.6.
x E1 Radio Port/channels available when the (high priority E1 x = Value of the parameter Pervalue x is greater than 0 channels) manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.44). y E1 Radio (low priority E1 channels) y = Value of the parameter Extra TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM profile with the highest number of E1 (see Fig.44) (2).
Radio Extra E1 (Radio-A)
Port/channels available when the value y is greater than 0
(1)
The E1 channels of the base board (tributaries A and B) and the A and B channel Radio Extra E1 are not available in matrix for the realization of connections because these channels are already used for the following pre-configured connections: Trib. A <-> A Radio Extra E1 Trib. B <-> B Radio Extra E1
The pre-configured connections cannot be modified nor deleted. (2) The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined by the user (see Fig.47).
263
Tab.6 NBUS ports of the cross-connection matrix

*
Nodal configuration (see Fig.44) No Nodal
NBUS ports - Cross-connection matrix Protection NBUS port NBUS 1 [1..63] Not protected NBUS 1 [64..126] NBUS 2 [1..63] NBUS 2 [64..126] Protected NBUS 1 [1..63] NBUS 2 [1..63] NBUS 1 [1..63] Not protected NBUS 1 [64..126] NBUS 2 [1..63] NBUS 2 [64..126] Protected NBUS [1..63] NBUS [64..126] Stream Nodal Bus 1 Configuration 63 E1 channels (163) 63 E1 channels (64126) 63 E1 channels (163) 63 E1 channels (64126) 63 protected E1 channels 63 protected E1 channels 63 E1 channels (163) 63 E1 channels (64126) 63 E1 channels (163) 63 E1 channels (64126) 63 protected E1 channels 63 protected E1 channels
(3) (4) (1) (2)
ALCplus2
Nodal Bus 2 Protected Nodal Bus 1 Protected Nodal Bus 2 Nodal Bus 1
ALPlus
Nodal Bus 2 Protected Nodal Bus Protected Nodal Bus
(1)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(2)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first channel of the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(3)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the first group of 63 E1 channels (163) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E11) is protected by the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-1); the second channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-2) and so on.
(4)
The second group of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1 channels (64126) of the Nodal Bus 2. The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 E1-64) is protected by the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-64); the second channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-65) is protected by the second channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-65) and so on.
264
RADIO
At the choice of Radio option, the program displays the following commands: Radio Branch... (pag.266). It manages the radio parameters.
265
Radio Branch
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command. For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters) and Radio Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands. The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters. In detail, it is possible to verify/modify: RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment (pag.266) Modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only) (pag.268) Operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter) (pag.268) Operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU) (pag.268) Resolution of the received power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.269) Resolution of the transmitted power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.269) Functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control) (pag.269) Maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx value) (pag.271) Intervention threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Threshold on local Prx) (pag.271) To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile (pag.271)
To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment

This operation does NOT automatically modify also the RF channel of the remote equipment. In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The Tx Frequency Selector parameter points out the RF channel (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter, use the UP/DOWN push-buttons to increase/decrease the RF channel. The RF channel can be modified at steps of 10 channels at a time (if the COARSE is present) or at steps of 1 channel at a time (if the COARSE is not present). Press Mode to activate/deactivate the display of the word. The frequency values change according to the equipment connected with the program. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
266
Fig.89 Settings tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
Fig.89 notes (1) If it is pointed out the wording UNAVAILABLE. Reason: Outdoor Unit Hardware Failure, check that the connection cable between the IDU section and the ODU one is not failure or missing. The word COARSE points out the granularity: if the word is displayed, the RF channel can be modified at steps of 10 channels at a time, while if the word is not present, the value can be modified at steps of 1 channel at a time. To activate/deactivate the display of the word, use the Mode pushbutton. (2) If active, the option: (3) On. The carrier is not modulated. Off. The carrier is modulated.
If active, the option: On. The RT power supply is on. Off. The RT power supply is off.
(4)
If active, the option: On. The transmitter is turned on. Off. The transmitter is turned off.
(5)
Box: Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change). For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx value corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68. Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change). For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
267
To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The Carrier Only parameter points out the modulation status of the RF carrier (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: On. The carrier is not modulated. Off. The carrier is modulated.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The Tx Transmitter parameter points out the operation of the transmitter (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: On. The transmitter is turned on. Off. The transmitter is turned off.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The RT PSU parameter points out the operation of the RT power supply (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: On. The RT power supply is on. Off. The RT power supply is off.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
268
To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)

For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Prx relevant to a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Prx resolution of the other branch. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The Prx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change) (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)

For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Ptx relevant to a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Ptx resolution of the other branch. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. The Ptx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change) (see Fig.89). 2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Powers tab. In the Tx Power Control area the functioning status of the ATPC is pointed out (see Fig.90). 3. To change the parameter, select the option: Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable). In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx value cursor). Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode. In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the signal at reception. The intervention thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see pag.271). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see pag.271). 4. Press Apply and confirm.
269
Fig.90 Powers tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
Fig.90 notes (1) If active, the option: (2) Manual, the ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable). Automatic, the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic one. This parameter defines the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range. Cursor: High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold value Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Press the push-button to display the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile. In detail, in the column: Active Modulation. ACM profile. Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
270
To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter

In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Powers tab. The Max Ptx value parameter points out the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nominal value) (see Fig.90). 3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. 4. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device

In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch. In 1+1 Freq. Div. system configuration the changes, to be active, must be set in both branches. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Powers tab. In the ATPC Threshold on local Prx area the intervention threshold of the ATPC is pointed out (see Fig.90): 3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value. In detail, the parameter: High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold value. Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold value.
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command. The Radio Branch contextual area opens. 2. Bring in front of page the Powers tab. 3. Press View Current ATPC Pow. The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile is displayed. In detail, in the column: Active Modulation. ACM profile Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
271
Fig.91 Table resuming the transmitted/received power for every ACM profile
272
MAINTENANCE
At the choice of Maintenance option, the program displays the following commands: LAN Statistics (pag.274). It manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports. S/N Meas (pag.277). It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N). Fade Margin (pag.278). It manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin). PRBS (pag.282). It manages the PRBS device. Radio Loop (pag.285). It manages the radio loops. Radio Switch A (pag.287). It manages the radio switch.
273
LAN Statistics
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System*
* The reset of the counters result can be executed only by users Station Operator and System. The LAN Statistics command manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports. In detail, it is possible: To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports (pag.274) To reset the counters results (pag.276)
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > LAN Statistics command. The LAN Statistics contextual area opens. 2. Select the port, whose counters you wish to verify. Under the selected port, the list of the relevant counters is displayed. The counters of only one port at a time can be displayed. Fig.92 shows an example.
Notes relevant to the counters. The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32. The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819. The Total Bytes Received counter, differently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not include the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet Size.
Fig.92 LAN Statistics contextual area
274
Fig.92 notes (1) Counter: Dropped Frames. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes. Total Bytes Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octects. Total Frames Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received. Broadcast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets. Multicast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address. CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Undersize Frames. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed. Oversize Frames. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed. Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment. Frames 64 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length. Frames 65 to 127 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive. Frames 128 to 255 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive. Frames 256 to 511 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive. Frames 512 to 1023 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and transmitted that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive. Frames 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of transmitted and received packets with a length greater than 1024 octects (incorrect packets included). Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLannet segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable. Valid Bytes Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This counter is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received. Bytes Sent. Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every data octet of a transmitted good packet. Valid Frames Received. Number of received correct frames. This counter is increased once for every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) received.
275
Frames Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every transmitted good packet. Out Multicast Frames. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broadcast packets. Out Broadcast Frames. Number of Broadcast frames sent. Out Unicast Frames. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frames Sent - Out Multicast Frames - Out Broadcast Frames. In Pause Frames. Number of good Flow Control frames received. Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
To reset the counters results

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > LAN Statistics command. The LAN Statistics contextual area opens (Fig.92). 2. Press Reset and confirm. The counters are reset.
276
S/N Meas
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the quality of the radio communication channel.
To verify the measure of the S/N ratio

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > S/N Meas command. The S/N Meas. contextual area opens. The S/N parameter points out the value of the S/N measure (see Fig.93).
Fig.93 S/N Meas. contextual area
Fig.93 notes (1) The measure is always in progress and the value is updated at regular intervals. The period between an update and the next one is displayed by the clock present in the Events List area (pag.33) of the WEB LCT page. If you wish to update the value immediately, press Refresh. For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1A area. For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Branch 1A (branch 1 S/N measure) and Branch 2A (branch 2 S/N measure) areas.
277
Fade Margin
The Fade Margin command manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin). With details it is possible: To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (pag.278). To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin (pag.280).
For more information about the Fade Margin go to pag.281.
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Margin)
The operation is traffic affecting. In order to execute the operation, it is necessary that: The remote equipment is inserted in the list of the remote equipment of the local equipment, and it is configured as Remote Link (equipment type) (see pag.51). If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the application will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Remote Link type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to the local equipment, to the other side of the radio link. In the remote equipment table, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address. The user is connected to both the terminals (local and remote) with profile System or Station Operator. In both the terminals, the re-timing modulation is not active (see pag.156). In both the terminals, there is not active alarms, except for the following: Alarms of group ETH LAN, P.M..., Plug-in module, STM-1 (see pag.308). Common group: Equip Manual Operation, MNGT/1 cable Fail, MNGT/2 cable Fail, RMON Alarm... LIM group: Local... Alarm Synthesis, REMOTE LIM Radio... Alarm Synthesis, IDU Board Trib... Rx AIS Alarm, ... Signal loss Alarm, ...Re-Timing Alarm. Radio group: ...PRBS Fail Alarm, ...Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode RT group: ...RT Rx Power Low Alarm, ...RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...Rx Active Status, ...Tx Active Status SETS group: IDU Sets... Drift Alarm, IDU Sets... LTI Alarm, IDU Sets Free Running Status. SNTP group: SNTP servers lost Alarm.
During the operation: In the WEB LCT page of the local terminal, it is not possible to change the context (the selection of the commands is forbidden). In both the terminals, the manual operation Fade Margin evaluation active is active.
The messages that can be displayed during the operation are reported at pag.280.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command. The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.94). If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not enabled for the equipment. Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To verify the functionalities enabled select the Features Management command (pag.141).
278
2. Type the expected value of Fade Margin into the Fade M. box. This value is normally present in the document related to the branch calculation (for example in LER Link Engineering Report). 3. A control on the typed value and the Ptx value, stored into the controller of the equipment, is executed. If the difference between the two value is greater of the maximum capacity of the fader internal to the equipment, the message Max available attenuation dB. An external attenuator is required. Continue anyway? is displayed. In this case, it is necessary to use an external attenuator and type, in the Ext. Att. box, the value of attenuation externally provided, otherwise the calculation will be executed on the basis of the attenuation made available by the equipment. 4. Press Start. The calculation of the link margin is started. The label of the Start button changes to Abort, whose choice stops the operation. The Current Ptx area indicates, step by step, the lowering of the transmission level. The Status box displays the progress of the operation as messages. For the 1+1 systems, the calculation is executed using the transmitter active at the moment of the start of the measure and relevant to both the remote receivers (see pag.281). At the end of the check, the message Step <value> of <value> completed. Continue? is displayed on each single branch. Press: No, if you wish to stop the procedure. Yes, if you wish to continue.
The display of the message Procedure Completed points out that the operation has been executed successfully. 5. Press View Log File to display the power levels and the calculations executed by the system during the calculation of the link margin. The WEB FadeMarginViewLog page opens. If you wish: To save the result, it is necessary to select and copy them into a text editor. To delete the result, press Reset Log File and confirm. If the results of the Fade Margin are not deleted, at the next activation of the calculation of the link margin (selection of the Start push-button) the data will be added to those already present. Fig.94 Fade Margin contextual area
279
Fig.94 notes (1) Column: Current Step. Transmitter and the receiver (radio link) which the results of the operation are referred to. Real F.M. (dB). Fade Margin value, recalculated considering the really measured characteristics of the equipment. Real Fade Margin Ver. Fade Margin value verified by the procedure (it is the result of the procedure).
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin

Message: Local equipment is not probably logged or Check local login The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator. Execute the login (pag.28). Check remote login The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator. Execute the login (pag.28). Local equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade Margin. Verify the active alarms (see pag.33) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms. Remote equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure cant go on The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade Margin. Verify the active alarms (see pag.33) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms. Remote equipment is unreacheable... The remote equipment is unreachable. Restore the connection or wait for the restore of the connection. Fade Margin Procedure active on this equipment The calculation of the link margin is already in progress. Adaptive modulation is active on local equipment. Turn it off and restart procedure In the local terminal the adaptive modulation is active. Disable the adaptive modulation (see pag.159). Remote Link Not Found! In the remote equipment table there is not an equipment configured as Remote Link (equipment type). Add the remote equipment to the list (see pag.53).
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command. The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.94). If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not enabled for the equipment. Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To verify the functionalities enabled select the Features Management command (pag.141). 2. Press View Tables.
280
The FadeMarginTablesLog page WEB is opened where the parameters stored in the controller of the local equipment are saved.
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info)

With calculation of the link margin, we mean the calculation of the difference between the level normally received by the equipment and the level received on the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm. The operation is automatically executed by the program using the parameters set by the user (expected value of Fade Margin and possible external fading) and the power parameters (Ptx, rated Ptx, etc.) stored in the equipment during the test of the equipment itself. The calculation is executed on the radio link composed by the equipment which the Fade Margin contextual area is referred to (local equipment) and by the equipment located on the other end of the link (remote equipment). For the system in: 1+0, only the measure Tx1\Rx1 is executed, using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections. 1+1 Hot Stand By, the calculation is executed on both the branches: first the operation is executed on the working Tx branch and both the remote receivers, then the program forces the switch in transmission and repeats the operation in such a way to calculate the link margin for all the possible Tx/Rx combinations: Tx1-Rx1, Tx1-Rx2, Tx2-Rx1, Tx2-Rx2. The measure is executed using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of the corresponding branch. 1+1 Frequency Diversity, the measures Tx1\Rx1 and Tx2\Rx2 are executed, using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of the corresponding branch. Local equipment 1+0 - remote equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy, the measures Tx1 local\Rx1 remote and Tx1 local\Rx2 remote are executed. Local equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy - remote equipment 1+0, the measure Tx local working\Rx1 remote and, after the switch on the local terminal, the measure Tx local working\Rx1 are executed.
When the calculation is activated, the Ptx level of the local equipment is automatically faded by 1dB at a time. For each single fading, the Ptx value and the possible alarms are stored to a file. The Ptx level is faded step by step until the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm on the remote terminal. Before activating the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed (he operations are executed only if the parameters are not in the indicated condition): In the local terminal the operation of the device for the automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) is forced to manual. In both the terminals, the value of 1800 seconds is set as timeout for the manual operations. The level of power transmitted by the local equipment is reported to the initial value (before the activation of the calculation). In the local terminal the ATPC device is reported to the initial operating modality (before the activation of the calculation).
At the end of the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed:
The restore of the initial values of the above mentioned parameters is automatically executed even after an interruption of the procedure.
281
PRBS
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). The PRBS command manages the PRBS device. In detail, it is possible: To verify the PRBS measure status (pag.282) To activate/reset the PRBS measure (pag.283) To deactivate the PRBS measure (pag.283) To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (pag.283) To enable/disable the E1 signal used for the measure (pag.284)
To verify the PRBS measure status

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command. The PRBS contextual area opens. The Start/Stop parameter points out the PRBS measure status (see Fig.95). Fig.95 PRBS contextual area
Fig.95 notes (1) Box: Sync Loss Alarm. The colour of box points out the status of the alarm: Green. The alarm is not active. Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
Fail Alarms. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the measure.
282
(2)
If active, the option: Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active. Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.
(3)
If active, the option: Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure. 2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure. 2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
(4)
If active, the option: Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream. Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of the expansion (116 or 132).
(5)
The value is meaningful only if the Enable option in the E1 Signal area is active.
To activate/reset the PRBS measure

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command. The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.95). 2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Start-Reset option. 3. Press Apply and confirm. The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.
To deactivate the PRBS measure

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command. The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.95). 2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Stop option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command. The PRBS contextual area opens. The Test Pattern parameter points out the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (see Fig.95). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure. 2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure. 2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
283
To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command. The PRBS contextual area opens. The E1 Signal parameter points out the status of the used E1 signal for the measure (see Fig.95). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel. Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of the expansion (116 or 132). The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate by means of the PRBS functionality. 3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box. If a value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as T12 synchronism in output (see Fig.51). 4. Press Apply and confirm. Only if the option Enable is selected, a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is immediately enabled to the use and then a message is displayed warning you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout. 5. Press Yes to continue the operation. Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting. If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable the tributary.
284
Radio Loop
Curr. Profile Reading Reading/Writing Monitor, Read Only Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops. In detail, it is possible: To verify the radio loops status (pag.285) To activate a radio loop (pag.286) To deactivate a radio loop (pag.286)
For more information about the radio loop go to pag.286. To verify the status and to activate/deactivate the base band loops go to pag.182.
To verify the radio loops status

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command. The Radio Loop contextual area opens The Loop Branch... parameter points out the current status of the loops (see Fig.96). Fig.96 Radio Loop contextual area
Fig.96 notes (1) Each loop is coupled with an option. When the option is selected, it points out that the loop is activated, while when it is selected the Loop OFF option, it points out that there is not any activated loop. For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment in configuration 1+1, there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop Branch 2 (loops branch 2) areas.
(2)
285
To activate a radio loop

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic. For more information see pag.286. 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command. The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.96). 2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate. It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables the preceding one. 3. Press Apply. A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Confirm the operation. The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
To deactivate a radio loop

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command. The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.96). 2. Select the Loop OFF option present in the Loop Branch area, relevant to the loop that you want to deactivate. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
Radio loop (more info)

In the 1+0 systems, the activation of the radio loop affects the traffic. In the 1+1 systems, the activation of the radio loop on the active branch affects the traffic. The activation of the radio loop on the stand-by branch does not affects the traffic. However, in this case, before executing the loop, the receiver must be forced to the active branch (see pag.287). Anyway, before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set (see pag.129). If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of the equipment or the equipment reset.
286
Radio Switch A
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). This command is available only for the equipment in 1+1 configuration. The Radio Switch A command manages the radio switch. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches (pag.287) To modify the management of the switching at reception (Rx Forced Switch) (pag.288) To modify the management of the switching at transmission (Tx Forced Switch) (pag.288) To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) (pag.289) To modify the Wait Time parameter (pag.289) To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration (pag.289)
For more information about the radio switch go to pag.289.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens displaying the status and the radio parameters of the radio switch (see Fig.97). Fig.97 Radio Switch A contextual area
Fig.97 notes (1) If active, the option: Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms. Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service. Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
287
(2)
If active, the option: Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one. Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 1. Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 2.
(3)
Tx Preferential and Tx Forced Switch parameters are available only for the equipment in isofrequential configuration 1+1. For the heterofrequential configuration 1+1, the parameters are not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time because the selection of the signal is executed at reception. Time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
(4)
To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens. The Rx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in reception (see Fig.97). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the equipment). Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service. Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens. The Tx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in transmission (see Fig.97). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal functioning mode of the equipment). Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service. Branch-2. The equipment is forced to use the branch 2 for the service.
3. Press Apply.
288
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens. The Tx Preferential parameter points out the management of the preferential branch in transmission (see Fig.97). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one. Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 1. Branch-2. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the branch 2.
To modify the Wait Time parameter

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens. The Wait Time parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.97). 2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 150 sec. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command. The Radio Switch A contextual area opens (see Fig.97). 2. Press Reset.
Radio switch (more info)

The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the ALCplus2 IDU equipment in protected configuration, generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises on the operating radio branch. The user can manage the radio branch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential branch.
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission) This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can be active (see pag.287/pag.288).
289
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmission. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission) This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there are not alarms that cause the switching (see pag.289). In fact, when the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on the branch on service there are present some specific alarms. When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the preferential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms). Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms. For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on. In any moment the user can force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time period expiration (see pag.289).
290
SWITCH
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream and/or protection of the nodal configuration is active (see Fig.43). At the choice of Switch option, the program displays the following commands: STM-1 (pag.292). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream. Nodal Bus (pag.296). It manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
291
STM-1
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream is active (MSP mode - see Fig.43). The STM-1 command manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch (pag.292) To modify the management of the STM-1 switch (pag.293) To modify the logic of the STM-1 switch (pag.294) To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential (pag.294) To modify the Wait Time parameter (pag.294) To force the switch on the preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration (pag.294)
For more information about the STM-1 switch go to pag.295.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens. In the Switch Status area the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch is pointed out (see Fig.98). Fig.98 STM-1 contextual area
292
Fig.98 notes (1) As displayed in the legend, the active STM-1 stream is pointed out by the green box while the standby STM-1 stream by the yellow box. Option: Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch). Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream. Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is never executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise. Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
(2)
(3)
Option: Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment. Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees the switch with the remote equipment.
(4)
Option: Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch clear. Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary), when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.
(5)
Wtr Time. Period (expressed in minutes) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the main stream so that the service is restored on it.
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens. The parameter MSP Protection points out the management mode of the STM-1 switch (see Fig.98). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch). Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream. Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch will be never executed, independently from the type of alarm which can raise. Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.
293
To modify the logic of STM-1 switch

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens. The Direction parameter points out the modality of management of the logic of the STM-1 switch (see Fig.98). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment. Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch with the remote equipment.
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens. The parameter Protection Mode points out if the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential (see Fig.98). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch clear. Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary), when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens. The Wtr Time (Min)parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.98). 2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 minutes. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command. The STM-1 contextual area opens (see Fig.98). 2. Press Wtr Clear. The main stream, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
294
STM-1 switch (more info)

The ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM1 16E can be configured by the user to operate with the STM-1 stream disabled, enabled or protected (see pag.153). When the user enables the protection of the STM-1 stream (MSP mode - Multiplex Section Protection) even the management of the STM-1 switch is enabled. The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise on the operating STM-1 stream.
STM-1 switching criteria When the STM-1 switch operates in automatic mode, the user can set one of the following switching logics: Unidirectional Logic. Only the local alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the switch. Bidirectional Logic. The local equipment agrees the switch of the STM-1 stream with the remote equipment: both the local and the remote alarms are considered among the criteria which determine the switch.
Forcing of the STM-1 stream to operation This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary STM-1 stream to operate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.293). This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the STM-1 switch. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential primary STM-1 stream This function foresees the choice of the primary STM-1 stream to use in preferential mode when there are not alarms which determine the switch (see pag.294). In fact, when the switch operates in automatic mode, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raises on the STM-1 streams in service. When the alarms clear, the controller does not execute the switch again. If the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential, when the switch is executed, if the STM-1 stream in service is not the primary, the controller executes the switch and uses the primary STM-1 stream for the service (naturally if the stream is not alarmed). Moreover it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not preferential (secondary) STM-1 stream before this returns to the preferential (primary) STM-1 stream, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two STM-1 streams in case of fluctuating alarms. For example, suppose an alarm raises which determines the switch of the service from the primary STM1 stream to the secondary. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately restored on the primary (preferential) STM-1 stream, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1 stream. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1 stream. On the contrary, the switch is postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm has not raised again and so on. In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time period expiration (see pag.294).
295
Nodal Bus
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP). This command is available only for ALCplus2 IDU equipment with IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Fig.43). The Nodal Bus command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus. In detail, it is possible: To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch (pag.296) To modify the management of the nodal switch (pag.297) To modify the Wait Time parameter (pag.297) To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration (pag.297)
For more information about the nodal switch go to pag.298.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command. The Nodal Bus contextual area opens, where the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch is pointed out (see Fig.99). Fig.99 Nodal Bus contextual area
296
Fig.99 notes (1) Wtr Time. Period (expressed in seconds) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it. Option: Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch). NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus. NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
(2)
To modify the management of the nodal switch

Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command. The Nodal Bus contextual area opens. The Forced Switch parameter points out the management mode of the nodal switch (see Fig.99). 2. To change the parameter, select the option: Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal operation of the switch). NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus. NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
3. Press Apply. Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout. 4. Press Yes to continue the operation. Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding setting.

1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command. The Nodal Bus contextual area opens. The Wtr Time (s) parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.99). 2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 seconds. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command. The Nodal Bus contextual area opens (see Fig.99). 2. Press Wtr Clear. The primary Bus, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.
297
Nodal switch (more info)

The ALCplus2 IDU equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E can be configured by the user to operate with the Nodal Bus disabled, enabled or protected (see pag.153). When the user enables the protection of the Nodal Bus even the management of the nodal switch is enabled. The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise on the operating Nodal Bus.
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary Nodal Bus to operate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.297). This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the nodal switch. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection When the user executes a single connection, which involves a protected NBUS channel, the matrix automatically executes the protection connection creating, in fact, a protected connection. In this case, the connection created by the user is the preferential connection (preferential NBUS connection) while the connection created by the matrix is the protection connection (protection NBUS connection). When the switch operates in automatic modality, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms are present on the working NBUS connection. When the alarms clear, the controller, if the working NBUS connection is not the preferential one, executes the switch and uses the preferential NBUS connection to work (of course if alarms are not present on the connection). In this condition it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not preferential NBUS connection before this returns to the preferential NBUS connection, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between the two connections in case of fluctuating alarms. For example, suppose an alarm occurs causing the switch from the preferential NBUS connection to the protection one. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately switched to the preferential NBUS connection, but postponed of n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the alarm on the preferential NBUS connection has not occurred again. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not occurred again, the switch takes place. Otherwise, the switch is postponed of other n seconds, during which the system verifies that the alarm has not occurred again and so on. In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential Nodal Bus without waiting for the Wait Time period expiration (see pag.297).
298
USER INPUT
At the choice of User Input option, the program displays the following commands: Local User Input (pag.300). It manages the local user input. Remote User Input (pag.303). It manages the remote user input.
299
Local User Input

The Local User Input command manages the local user input configuration. In detail, it is possible: To verify the local user input status (pag.300) To verify/modify the name of a local user input (pag.301) To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input (pag.301) To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input (pag.301)
For more information on the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.302.
To verify the local user input status

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command. The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the local user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.100). Fig.100 Local User Input contextual area
Fig.100 notes (1) The colour and the wording inside the box point out the status of the local user input: Colour Green Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red Wording Inactive Active Active Active Active Active Status User input alarm not activated User input status signal activated User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level User input alarm activated and with Major severity level User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level
300
(2)
Option: Normally Open. The user input is considered active when its terminal is referred to ground. Normally Close. The user input is considered active when its terminal is open.
(3)
Option: Disable. The alarm is disabled. Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling. Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To verify/modify the name of a local user input

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command. The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the local user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.100). 2. To change the name of a user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command. The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the rest condition of the local user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.100). 2. To change the rest condition of a user input set, into the Input Operation box, the option: Normally Open. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its terminal is referred to ground. Normally Close. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its terminal is open.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command. The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the local user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.100). 2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option: Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input. Status, to: Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Warning level. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Minor level.
Warning, to:
Minor, to:
301
Major, to: Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Major level. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Critical level.
Critical, to:
Enabling the user input alarms (more info)

Disabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm has never occurred. On the other hand, enabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current alarms and in the alarm history.
302
Remote User Input

The Remote User Input command manages the remote user input configuration. In detail, it is possible: To verify the remote user input status (pag.303) To change the name of a remote user input (pag.304) To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input (pag.304)
It is not possible to modify the rest condition of the remote user input. The rest condition is set only locally. For more information about the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.302.
To verify the remote user input status

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Remote User Input command. The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the remote user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.101). Fig.101 Remote User Input contextual area
Fig.101 notes (1) The colour and the wording inside the box display the status of the remote user input: Colour Green Green Light blue Yellow Orange Red Wording Inactive Active Active Active Active Active Status User input alarm not activated User input status signal activated User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level User input alarm activated and with Major severity level User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level
303
(2)
Option: Disable. The alarm is disabled. Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling. Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To change the name of a remote user input

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Remote User Input command. The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the remote user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.101). 2. To change the name of a remote user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Remote User Input command. The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the remote user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.101). 2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option: Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input. Status, to: Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Warning level. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Minor level. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Major level. Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input. Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with Critical level.
Warning, to:
Minor, to:
Major, to:
Critical, to:
304
USER OUTPUT
Curr. Profile
The User Output command manages the user output configuration. In detail, it is possible: To verify the user output status (pag.305) To verify/modify the user output name (pag.306) To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of each user output (pag.306). To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output (pag.306). To enabled the forced activation of the relays contacts from operator (pag.307). To force the user output activation (pag.307). To remove the forcing of the user output (pag.307).
To verify the user output status

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens, where the status of the user outputs is pointed out (see Fig.102). Fig.102 User Output contextual area
Fig.102 notes (1) The colour/wording inside the box display the status of the user output: Colour Green Red Wording Inactive Active Status User output not activated User output activated (relay contacts activated)
305
(2)
Option: Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Force. The UO is enabled to force the activation by operator. Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Unforce. The UO is activated after the forcing by operator. Unmapped. No signal is associated to UO. Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or user input). In order to verify the detail of the signals, press Mapping.
(3)
Option: Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the name of an user output

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens, where the name of the user outputs is pointed out (see Fig.102). 2. To change the parameter type, into the text box, an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user output

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens, where the operating modality of the relay contacts of the user outputs is pointed out (see Fig.102). 2. To change the parameter set, into the Active State box, the option: Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens, where the signals associated to the user output (UO) are pointed out (see Fig.102). 2. To change the parameter set, into the Linked to box, the Map option. 3. Press Mapping. The Mapping window opens. 4. To activate the check-box of the: Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corresponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels: Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.
306
Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to. Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to. Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.
Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms: Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of the ODU section of the local equipment. Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of the ODU section of the remote equipment.
Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms: Radio Equipment Local Lim A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment. Radio Equipment Remote Lim <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.
User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input ) and/or remote (User Input Remote) user inputs. Select the wished user inputs.
The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box and by the change of colour of the relevant name: from black to blue. Its deactivation removes the check sign and the colour becomes black again. The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals. 5. Press OK. 6. Press Apply and confirm.
To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens (see Fig.102). 2. Into the Linked to box, set the Forced by Op. option. 3. Press Apply and confirm.
To force the user output activation

The user output has to be enabled for the forcing by operator (wording Forced by Operator into the State field - UO status box green, wording Inactive - see Fig.102). If it is not enabled, it is necessary to enable it (see pag.307). 1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens (see Fig.102). 2. Press Force. The push-button is replaced by the Unforce push-button. The user output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing (see pag.307).
To remove the forcing of the user output

1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command. The User Output contextual area opens (see Fig.102). 2. Press Unforce. The push-button is replaced by the Force push-button. The Unforce push-button is present when the forcing of the UO is active (wording Forced by Operator into the State field - UO status box red, wording Active - see Fig.102).
307
ALARMS LIST
Tab.7 points out the list of the alarms relevant to the ALCplus2 IDU equipment. The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts of the equipment. In detail: Equipment User input Common Eth Lan LIM Node P.M. G.828 P.M. G.829 B1 P.M. G.829 B2-M1 P.M. Rx Power P.M. Tx Power P.M. VC12 G.828 P.M. ACM Plug-in module Radio RIM RT SETS SNTP STM-1 Unit Vc4 Vc12
For each alarm, the wording present in the Event List area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) and the wording present in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area (see Fig.37) are displayed. Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm displayed in the Event List area, represent a variable. The symbol -means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area.
308
Tab.7 - Alarms list Events List alarms Equipment Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning User input User Input - <UI number> <UI name> Alarm Status Common [<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side AIS Alarm [<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side Fail Alarm [<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side AIS Alarm [<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side Fail Alarm Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link Alarm Equip Manual Operation Fan Alarm MNGT/1 cable Fail MNGT/2 cable Fail RMON Alarm <alarm description> WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address> RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data Link Alarm Eth Lan IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm LIM IDU Board LIM Temperature IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Rx AIS Alarm IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Signal loss Alarm IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm Local [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis REMOTE LIM Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis IDU Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm Node Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm P.M. G.828 P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm P.M. G.828-<measure type>* UAS Alarm P.M. G.829 B1 P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MEsAlarm pmG829RstB1-15MSepAlarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm pmG828-UASAlarm nodeLinkLosAlarm nodeLinkLofAlarm nodeLinkMsAisAlarm nodeLinkCheckAlarm radioEquipLimTemperatureAlarm ppiRxAisAlarm ppiLosAlarm radioBranchDemodulatorFailAlarm radioBranchModulatorFailAlarm radioEquipLocalLimAlarmSynthesis radioEquipRemoteLimAlarmSynthesis ppiE1SynchAlarm ethLanPhyLinkLossForwarding ethLanPhyLinkLoss ethLanPhyMasterSlaveConfigurationFault ethLanPhySync ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAAisAlarm radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAFailAlarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAAisAlarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAFailAlarm radioEquipEoc(E1/Stm1)Alarm equipManualOperation radioEquipFanAlarm equipMngt1CableFailAlarm equipMngt2CableFailAlarm equipRmonAlarm radioEquipEOCRadioLinkAlarm Alarm Severity Configuration
LIM BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchRtOduIduCommAlarm
309
Events List alarms P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>* UAS Alarm P.M. G.829 B2-M1 P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS-BIDI Alarm P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>* UAS-FE Alarm P.M. Rx Power P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm P.M. Tx Power P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm P.M. VC12 G.828
Alarm Severity Configuration pmG829RstB1-15MSesAlarm pmG829RstB1-24HEsAlarm pmG829RstB1-24HSepAlarm pmG829RstB1-24HSesAlarm pmG829RstB1-UASAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesFEAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASBIDIAlarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASFEAlarm pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt2sAlarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt3sAlarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts4Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts5Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts3Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts4Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts5Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts3Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts4Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts3Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts4Alarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsAlarm
310
Events List alarms
Alarm Severity Configuration
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesFEAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASBIDIAlarm P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASFEAlarm P.M. ACM P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 256QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 32QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm Plug-in module IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status Radio [<radio branch label>] PRBS Fail Alarm radioEquipPrbsFailAlarm RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER radioEquipLinkIdAlarm radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm radioEquipTxFailCheckAlarm plug-inModuleAlarm plug-inModuleMismatchAlarm plug-inStatusChange IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm plug-inLosAlarm pmACM-15M-Alarm pmACM-15M-128QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-16QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-256QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-32QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-4QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-64QAMAlarm pmACM-15M-8PSKAlarm pmACM-24H-Alarm pmACM-24H-128QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-16QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-256QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-32QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-4QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-64QAMAlarm pmACM-24H-8PSKAlarm
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode radioEquipRevertiveAlarm RIM BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm RT BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchIduOduCommunicationAlarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm radioBranchRtIfFail radioBranchRemoteRimAlarmSynthesis radioBranchCableOpenAlarm radioBranchCableShortAlarm radioBranchLocalRimAlarmSynthesis radioBranchRimPsuFailAlarm
311
Events List alarms BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Low Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status SETS IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm IDU Sets Free Running Status IDU Sets Holdover Status SNTP SNTP servers lost Alarm STM-1 IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Rdi Alarm Unit <unit name> Unit Fail Alarm <unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm <unit name> Unit Missing Alarm <unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm <unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm Vc4 IDU VC4 AU-4 AIS Alarm IDU VC4 AU-4 Loss of Pointer Alarm IDU VC4 B3 Excessive Ber Alarm IDU VC4 B3 Signal Degrade Alarm IDU VC4 J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm IDU VC4 RDI Alarm IDU VC4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm IDU VC4 Unequipped Alarm IDU VC-4 Loss Of Multiframe Alarm Vc12 STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Excessive BER Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 RDI Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Degrade Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU LOP Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU Path AIS Alarm STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Unequipped Alarm * Refer to pag.56
Alarm Severity Configuration radioBranchLocalOduAlarmSynthesis radioBranchRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis radioBranchRtVcoFail radioBranchRxPowerLowAlarm radioBranchTxPowerLowAlarm radioBranchRxIfOutalarm radioBranchRxQualityLowAlarm radioBranchRxQualityLowWarning radioBranchRxActiveStatus radioBranchTxActiveStatus timingSinkActiveStatus timingSinkDriftAlarm timingSinkLosAlarm timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus sntpClientUnicastServerLost stm1B2ExcessiveBerAlarm stm1B2SignalDegradeAlarm stm1J0TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm stm1LofAlarm stm1LosAlarm stm1MsAisAlarm stm1MsRdiAlarm unitFailAlarm unitHwMismatchAlarm unitMissingAlarm unitNotRespondingAlarm unitSwMismatchAlarm vc4Au4AisAlarm vc4Au4LossPointerAlarm vc4B3ExcessiveBerAlarm vc4B3SignalDegradeAlarm vc4J1TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm vc4HpRdiAlarm vc4SignalLabelMismatchAlarm vc4UnequippedAlarm vc4LossOfMultiframeAlarm vc12ExcessiveBerAlarm vc12RdiAlarm vc12SignalDegradeAlarm vc12SignalLabelMismatchAlarm vc12TuLopAlarm vc12TuPathAisAlarm vc12UnequippedAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm vc12TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
312
OPERATIONS LIST
A
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...............................................144 Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism, verify/modify .....196 Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................156 Aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the specific table, verify/modify ....................................183 Alarm/status signals, save to file ..............................................................................................102 Alarms status of a VC-12, verify ...............................................................................................250 ATPC Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................269 Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................271 Auto negotiation for the external port, restart the procedure ........................................................196
B
Behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ...................................199 Behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ....................................214 Branches functional status, verify .............................................................................................. 26
C
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin), execute ..................................................................278 Characteristics of the equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify .................127 Communication ports, verify/modify .......................................................................................... 38 Communication stack Modify .............................................................................................................................123 Verify ..............................................................................................................................122 Connection cost of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ......................................................204 Connection cost of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .............................................................219 Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port, verify/modify .....................199 Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port, verify/modify ......................214 Control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (STM-1), verify/modify .............................................234 Control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (VC-4), verify/modify ...............................................241 Control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte (VC-12), verify/modify .............................................248 Current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ..............................................................208 Current status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ...............................................................236
D
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...........................................144 Default Vid value of the external port, verify/modify ...................................................................197 Default Vid value of the internal port, verify/modify ....................................................................212 Delete one or more connections ...............................................................................................259 Disable an Auto-Loop ..............................................................................................................260 Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format .........................................................251 Display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet ports .......................................................................................................................143 Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port ........................................................144
313
E
E1 tributary Activate/deactivate the loop ................................................................................................230 Activate/deactivate the use .................................................................................................229 Verify the status ................................................................................................................228 Verify/modify the label .......................................................................................................229 ELP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................205 Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue, verify/modify ...............................185 Enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ......................................................210 Enable manually the laser transmission (STM-1 - optical int.) .......................................................238 Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ...................................................................259 Enable the new functionalities ..................................................................................................142 Enabling of the alarms Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................132 Verify ..............................................................................................................................131 Enabling of the switch in transmission, verify/modify ..................................................................164 Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port, verify/modify ................................195 Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for the external port, verify/modify ................................................................................................196 Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the specific table for the internal port, verify/modify ................................................................................................212 Enabling status of the external port, verify/modify ......................................................................192 Enabling status of the flow control of the external port, verify/modify ............................................195 Enabling status of the internal port, verify/modify .......................................................................211 Enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ..................................................209 Enabling status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify ...................................................237 Enabling status of the LLF modality of the external port, verify/modify ..........................................206 Equipment configuration Save to file .......................................................................................................................102 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 26 Equipment connection status, verify ........................................................................................... 26 Equipment firmware Switch the functioning of the memory benches ......................................................................121 Update .............................................................................................................................120 Verify the version ..............................................................................................................119 Equipment functional status, verify ............................................................................................ 26 Equipment identifier Modify .............................................................................................................................. 37 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 26 Equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALCplus2), verify/modify ......................................154 Equipment identifier in the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ..........................................154 Equipment login/monitor status, verify ....................................................................................... 26 Equipment properties (type, MIB version, identifier, addresses, reference date/time), verify .............. 36 Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 37 Equipment software reset .............................................................................................37, 43, 123 Equipment type, verify ............................................................................................................. 26 Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify .................................................................185 Ethernet Line Protection Verify the status of the external ports ..................................................................................224 Execute a Tributary-Radio connection .......................................................................................258 Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ...................................................................................258 Execute an E1 NBUS E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) ................................................261 Execute the login of the user .................................................................................................... 28 Execute the logout of the user .................................................................................................. 29 Execute the test "laser functioning status" (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ..................................................210 Execute the test "laser functioning status" (STM-1 - optical int.) ...................................................239
314
F
Fade Margin results, delete ......................................................................................................278 Fade Margin results, verify ......................................................................................................278 Forwarding of the trap of the alarm Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................132 Verify ..............................................................................................................................131 Functionalities enabled for the equipment, verify ........................................................................141
H
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify .............................................................................186
I
Input synchronism sources Enable/disable the use .......................................................................................................169 Force the use ....................................................................................................................171 Set a source as preferential ................................................................................................172 Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 ..................................................172 Set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ..........................................172 Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................173 Verify the status ................................................................................................................167 Verify/modify the use priority ..............................................................................................171 Interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4), verify/modify ....................................................197 Intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ................................236 Intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ...............................235 Intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (VC-4), verify/modify ..................................243 Intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-4), verify/modify .................................242 Intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (VC-12), verify/modify .............................247 Intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-12), verify/modify ............................246 Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port, verify/modify ......................................194 IP address of remote users, set ................................................................................................139 IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment, modify ............................................................... 37
L
LAN Statistics Reset the counters results .................................................................................................276 Verify the counters ............................................................................................................274 Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................160 Local user input Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................301 Name, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................301 Rest condition, verify/modify ..............................................................................................301 Status, verify ....................................................................................................................300 Logout of a user, force ............................................................................................................135 Loop on line side of the external port, activate/deactivate ............................................................207 Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................160
M
Management of nodal configuration, verify/modify ......................................................................153 Management of STM-1 stream, verify/modify .............................................................................153 Management of synchronisation, verify/modify ...........................................................................153 Manual Operations Timeout, verify/modify .................................................................................130 Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (external port), verify/modify .........................202
315
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port), verify/modify .........................217 Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ....................................................271 Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ...................................................................185 Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................268
N
Network password and timeout, modify .....................................................................................138 Nodal switch Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .........................................................................................................................297 Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................297 Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................297 Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................296 Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................296 Number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams), verify/modify ...................160 Number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALCplus2), verify/modify ....................................154 Number of equipment of the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ........................................154 Number of high priority E1 streams, verify/modify ......................................................................160
O
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role), verify/modify ..................................................196 Operating status of the adaptive modulation Modify .............................................................................................................................159 Verify ..............................................................................................................................156 Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................268 Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................268 Operations executed by the users, save to file ............................................................................102 Operations list stored into the equipment controller, delete ..........................................................105 Output queue of a packet according to its Tag 802.1p, verify/assign .............................................185
P
Password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password), change .............................................139 Password and timeout of the System user, modify ......................................................................138 PM Activate a measure ........................................................................................................ 62, 66 Activate all measures in a group ........................................................................................... 62 Change the type of the displayed counters (ACM Radio A) ........................................................ 91 Change the type of the displayed parameters (G828..., G829...) ............................................... 66 Change the type of the displayed parameters (RxPwr Radio) .................................................... 97 Change the type of the displayed parameters (TxPwr Radio) ...................................................100 Deactivate a measure .................................................................................................... 62, 66 Deactivate all measures in a group ....................................................................................... 63 Display the results of the measurements ............................................................................... 63 Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio A) ............................................. 94 Reset the threshold exceeding alarms ................................................................................... 66 Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) ................................................................. 66 Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure ....................................................................... 81 Set the thresholds (ACM Radio A) ......................................................................................... 91 Set the thresholds (G828 E1...) ............................................................................................ 80 Set the thresholds (G828 Radio) ........................................................................................... 76 Set the thresholds (G828 STM-1 Vc12) .................................................................................. 86 Set the thresholds (G829 MstB2M1 STM-1) ............................................................................ 71 Set the thresholds (G829 RstB1 STM-1) ................................................................................ 67 Set the thresholds (RxPwr Radio) ......................................................................................... 97 Set the thresholds (TxPwr Radio) .........................................................................................100 Verify the status of the measurements .................................................................................. 61 Ports through which the messages in input from the external port, enable/disable ..........................200
316
Ports through which the messages in input from the internal port, enable/disable ...........................215 Power profile of the RF transmitter, verify/modify .......................................................................159 PRBS Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................283 Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................283 Measure status, verify ........................................................................................................282 Pattern type used for the measure, verify/modify ..................................................................283 Used E1 signal for the measure, enable/disable .....................................................................284 Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue, verify/modify .........................................................................................................................201 Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue, verify/modify .........................................................................................................................215 Priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.), verify/modify ...............................................161 Priority of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ..................................................................204 Priority of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .........................................................................219 Protection of the nodal configuration (ALplus), verify/modify ........................................................155
Q
Queue to which the packet must be assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3), verify/modify .........................................................................................................................186
R
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................166 Radio configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................................151 Radio loop Activate ...........................................................................................................................286 Deactivate ........................................................................................................................286 Verify the status ................................................................................................................285 Radio parameters, verify .......................................................................................................... 26 Radio switch Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............289 Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................288 Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................288 Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................289 Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................289 Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................287 Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................287 Reference band/modulation Modify .............................................................................................................................159 Verify ..............................................................................................................................156 Remote element list Remove an equipment ........................................................................................................ 54 Remote equipment list Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 52 Add an equipment .............................................................................................................. 53 Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 53 Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 52 Reset ................................................................................................................................ 54 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 51 Remote user input Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................304 Name, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................304 Status, verify ....................................................................................................................303 Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................269 Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................269 Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ........................175 Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) ............................................................................126 RF channel, verify/modify ........................................................................................................266
317
Running Default Gateway Delete ............................................................................................................................... 46 Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 46 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 44 Running Routing Table Add an element .................................................................................................................. 45 Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 45 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 44
S
S/N measure, verify ...............................................................................................................277 Save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to file .................................................................................................................102 Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ...................................................125 SD memory card Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit .....................113 Automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory ........................................................114 Copy the equipment sw from SD memory to controller (Sw Dwl SD) .........................................116 Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from SD memory .................................115 Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) ....................................116 Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw update from SD memory ............................................................................116 Force the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the equipment sw ...................................................................................................................116 Status and configuration, verify ................................................................................... 111, 115 Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1), verify/modify ....234 Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4), verify/modify ......242 Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12), verify/modify .....249 Severity level of the alarm Modify .............................................................................................................................133 Verify ..............................................................................................................................131 Signal Label value (VC-12), verify ............................................................................................249 Signal Label value (VC-4), verify/modify ....................................................................................244 Signals (Events List) Filter the list ...................................................................................................................... 34 Verify the current filters ...................................................................................................... 34 Signals stored into the equipment controller, delete ....................................................................105 SNTP functionality Activate ...........................................................................................................................107 Deactivate ........................................................................................................................107 Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................107 Verify the status ................................................................................................................106 Spanning Tree Protocol Verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................................223 Verify the status of the ethernet ports ..................................................................................222 Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................................221 Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................................222 Verify/modify the priority of a bridge ....................................................................................224 Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................................221 Verify/modify the version ...................................................................................................220 Start-up of the WEB LCT application From browser .................................................................................................................... 17 From SCT/LMT ................................................................................................................... 23 Status of the external port in relation to the ELP, verify ...............................................................204 Status of the external port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................202 Status of the internal port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................217 Status of the STM-1 alarms, verify ............................................................................................235 Status of the STM-1 loops (line/inner side), verify/modify ............................................................234 Status of the STM-1 stream, verify/modify .................................................................................232 Status of the VC-4 alarms, verify ..............................................................................................242 STM-1 switch
318
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ........294 Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................293 Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................294 Set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential .......................................................................294 Switch logic (modify) .........................................................................................................294 Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................292 Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................292 Stored Default Gateway Delete ............................................................................................................................... 50 Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 50 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 48 Stored Routing Table Add an element .................................................................................................................. 49 Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 50 Verify ............................................................................................................................... 48 STP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................204 STP for the internal port, enable/disable ....................................................................................218
T
T and N parameters, verify/modify ...........................................................................................165 T0 synchronisation Force the status ................................................................................................................173 Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................173 T12 synchronisation Manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface (output/input) of tributary A/B ............................................................................................174 Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile, display ..................................................................................................................................271 Table summarizing the radio transport, display ...........................................................................158 Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................164 Timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page, verify/modify ......... 28 To display the connections of the equipment in table format .........................................................257 Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ...............................125 Transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ............................................209 Transmission mode of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify .............................................238 Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm, reset ............................................................................166 Type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ......................................................................209 Type of laser module (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ......................................................................237
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................160 User list Add a user ........................................................................................................................137 Delete a user ....................................................................................................................138 Modify a user ....................................................................................................................137 Verify ..............................................................................................................................136 User output Enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ..............................................307 Force the activation ...........................................................................................................307 Functioning mode of the relay contacts, verify/modify ............................................................306 Name, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................306 Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................307 Signal coupled, verify/modify ..............................................................................................306 Status, verify ....................................................................................................................305 User profile, verify ................................................................................................................... 26 Users connected to the equipment, verify ..................................................................................134
319
V
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to, verify/modify ..............................................................................202 Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to, verify/modify ..............................................................................216 Values of the Ptx parameters stored in the equipment controller and used for the calculation of the Fade Margin, verify ...................................................................................280 Verify/modify the connection label ............................................................................................260 Vid of the external port to the default value, force ......................................................................200 Vid of the internal port to the default value, force .......................................................................215 VLan Create a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................189 Delete a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................190 Modify a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................189 Verify the existing virtual LANs ............................................................................................187
W
Wake Up functionality Activate ...........................................................................................................................108 Deactivate ........................................................................................................................109 Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................108 Verify the status ................................................................................................................108 WEB LCT Update .............................................................................................................................122 Verify the version ........................................................................................................ 28, 121
320
PARAMETERS LIST
Numerics
2Mb/s EOC, communication port .................. 41 802.1p Priority Management ......................185
Collisions .................................................275 CRC Align Errors .......................................275 Curr. Profile .............................................. 26 Current Ptx Set ........................................279 Current Step ............................................279 Current user profile ................................... 26
A
ACM Engine .............................................159 ACM Radio A (PM) ..................................... 89 Active Manual Operation ............................129 Agent IP Address ....................................... 36 Alarm ...................................................... 34 Alarm Threshold .......................................166 ATPC ATPC Regulation ..................................270 ATPC Threshold on local Prx ..................271 Max Ptx value .....................................271 Tx Power Control .................................269 ATPC Threshold on local Prx .......................271 Automatic Shutdown .................................209 Automatic Shutdown (STM-1 - optical int.) ..238 Available Remote Element List .................... Conn. Status ........................................ Equipment ID ...................................... IP Address ........................................... Radio Direction .................................... Radio Link Status ................................. Station ................................................ 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
D
Default Gateway ....................................... 47 Default Priority ................................. 202, 217 Default Vid ...................................... 197, 212 Delay ......................................................187 Direction .................................................294 Dropped Frames .......................................275 DSCP ......................................................187
E
E1 Retiming .............................................175 E1 Signal ................................................284 Egress Priority Policy .................................185 Elapsed Time ...........................................282 ELP LAN-1 ................................................224 LAN-2 ................................................224 LAN-3 ................................................224 LAN-4 ................................................224 Role ...................................................224 Status ................................................225 Version ..............................................225 Equipment Bench Status ...........................119 Equipment configuration ............................. 26 Equipment connection status ...................... 26 Equipment Date/Time ................................ 36 Equipment functional status ........................ 26 Equipment ID ........................................... 36 Equipment identifier .................................. 26 Equipment login/monitor status ................... 26 Equipment radio parameters ....................... 26 Equipment Software Restart ....................... 36 Equipment Software Version ......................119 Equipment Type ................................... 26, 36 Errors .....................................................282 Ethernet IP Address ................................... 36 Ethernet Switch 802.1p Priority Management .................185
B
B2 Excessive BER Threshold (STM-1) ..........236 B2 Signal Degrade Threshold (STM-1) .........235 B3 Excessive BER Threshold (VC-4) ............243 B3 Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-4) ...........242 Bandwidth & Modulation ............................159 BER ........................................................282 Branches functional status .......................... 26 Broadcast Frames Received .......................275 Bytes Sent ..............................................275
C
Cable crossover .......................................194 Carrier Only .............................................268 CEM Password .........................................139 Check Period ...........................................166
321
Egress Priority Policy ............................185 LLF Hysteresis .....................................186 MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................183 Max Packet Size ..................................185 QinQ ETH Type ....................................185 Ethernet, communication port ..................... 39 Ethernet/OSI Address Relation Gosip .................................................. 37 IP Address ........................................... 37 Excessive BER Threshold (VC-12) ...............247 Expected Trace ................................ 233, 242 Expected Type (equipment hardware) .........127 External Atten. .........................................279 Extra TDM Cap .........................................160
I
ID ........................................................... 26 In Pause Frames ......................................276 Ingress Filtering Check ...................... 199, 214 Interface Type .........................................197 Internal Source ........................................168 IP ...........................................................123 IP Over OSI, communication port ................ 42 IP v4 DSCP ..............................................187 IP v6 DSCP ..............................................187
J
J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1) Expected Trace ...................................233 Received Trace ....................................233 Sent Trace ..........................................233 Trace Type .........................................234 J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4) ..........................241 Expected Trace ...................................242 Received Path Trace .............................242 Sent Trace ..........................................242 J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12) ........................248 Expected Trace ...................................249 Received Path Trace .............................249 Sent Trace ..........................................249 Jabbers ...................................................275
F
Fade Margin ............................................279 Current Ptx Set ...................................279 Current Step .......................................279 External Atten. ....................................279 Fade Margin ........................................279 Local IP ..............................................279 Real Fade Margin .................................279 Real Fade Margin Ver. ..........................279 Remote IP ..........................................279 Fail Alarms ..............................................282 Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx .................................................195 Force Default VID ............................. 200, 215 Force Version ...........................................220 Forced Switch ..........................................297 Forward Delay .........................................221 Fragments ...............................................275 Frame Egress Mode .......................... 199, 214 Frames 1024 to max pck size .....................275 Frames 128 to 255 Oct. ............................275 Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ............................275 Frames 64 Oct. ........................................275 Frames 65 to 127 Oct ...............................275 Frames Sent ............................................276 FTP, protocol .............................................. 9
L
LAN 1 ............................................. 191, 224 LAN 1,2 - 3,4 (electrical int.) Cable crossover ...................................194 M/S Autoneg. ......................................197 Master/Slave Role ................................196 LAN 1,2,3,4 802.1Q Default Vid ....................................197 Force Default VID ...........................200 Frame Egress Mode .........................199 Ingress Filtering Check ....................199 Port Based VLAN ............................200 ELP Role ..............................................205 SPT/ELP ........................................206 Status ...........................................205 Version .........................................205 Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx ............................................195 Line Loop ...........................................207 LLF ....................................................206 MAC Learning ......................................196 Priority Default Priority ...............................202 Priority ..........................................201 Rate Control .......................................192 Speed/Duplex .....................................195 STP Role ..............................................203 SPT/ELP ........................................204
G
G828 E1 Line Side (PM) ............................. 78 G828 E1 Radio Side (PM) ........................... 82 G828 Radio (PM) ....................................... 74 G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 (PM) ........................ 69 G829 RstB1 STM-1 .................................... 64
H
Hello Time ...............................................221 Help Web Server ......................................... 9 HW Version (equipment hardware) .............127
322
Status ...........................................203 Version .........................................203 STP/ELP Path Cost ......................................204 Priority ..........................................204 LAN 2 ............................................. 191, 224 LAN 3 ............................................. 191, 224 LAN 3,4 Interface Type ....................................197 LAN 3,4 (optical) Laser Control Automatic Shutdown .......................209 Module Type ..................................209 Transmitter Control .........................209 LAN 4 ............................................. 191, 224 LAN Statistics Broadcast Frames Received ..................275 Bytes Sent .........................................275 Collisions ............................................275 CRC Align Errors ..................................275 Dropped Frames ..................................275 Fragments ..........................................275 Frames 1024 to max pck size ................275 Frames 128 to 255 Oct .........................275 Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ........................275 Frames 512 to 1023 Oct .......................275 Frames 64 Oct. ...................................275 Frames 65 to 127 Oct. .........................275 Frames Sent .......................................276 In Pause Frames .................................276 Jabbers ..............................................275 Late Collisions .....................................275 Multicast Frames Received ....................275 Out Broadcast Frames ..........................276 Out Multicast Frames ...........................276 Out Pause Frames ...............................276 Out Unicast Frames .............................276 Oversize Frames .................................275 Total Bytes Received ............................275 Total Frames Received .........................275 Undersize Frame .................................275 Valid Bytes Received ............................275 Valid Frames Received .........................275 LAN-1 .....................................................222 LAN-2 .....................................................222 LAN-3 .....................................................222 LAN-4 .....................................................222 Laser Control (STM-1 - optical int.) .............236 Late Collisions ..........................................275 LCT PPP, communication port ...................... 40 Link identification number .........................160 LLF .........................................................206 LLF Hysteresis .........................................186 Local IP ...................................................279 Local Link ID ...........................................160 Lower Modulation .....................................160
MAC Address ..................................... 36, 223 MAC Learning .................................. 196, 212 Manual Operation .....................................171 Manual Operation Timeout .........................129 Manual Switch .........................................172 Master/Slave Role ....................................196 Max Age ..................................................222 Max Packet Size .......................................185 Max Ptx value ..........................................271 Module Type ............................................209 Module Type (STM-1 - optical int.) ..............237 MSP Protection .........................................293 Multicast Frames Received .........................275
N
Network Password ....................................138 NODAL 1 (T0) ..........................................168 Nodal Configuration ..................................153 Nodal ID .................................................154 Nodal Protection .......................................155 Nodal switch Forced Switch .....................................297 Wtr Clear ...........................................297 Wtr Time ............................................297 Nodal Type ..............................................154 Node Id ..................................................154 Number of Nodes .....................................154
O
OSI ........................................................123 Out Broadcast Frames ...............................276 Out Multicast Frames ................................276 Out Pause Frames ....................................276 Out Unicast Frames ..................................276 Oversize Frames ......................................275
P
Par Part Num (equipment hardware) ...........127 Part Number (equipment hardware) ............127 Path Cost ........................................ 204, 219 PC Date/Time ........................................... 36 Performances ............................................ 61 Permanent Login ......................................139 Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................160 PM ACM Radio A ........................................ 89 G828 E1 Line Side ................................ 78 G828 E1 Radio Side .............................. 82 G828 Radio ......................................... 74 G828 STM-1 - Vc12 .............................. 84 G828 STM-1 - Vc12 (PM) ....................... 84
M
M/S Autoneg. ..........................................197 MAC Addr. Aging Time ..............................183
323
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 ........................... G829 RstB1 STM-1 ............................... RxPwr Radio ........................................ TxPwr Radio ........................................
69 64 95 98
Start/Stop ..........................................282 Sync Loss Alarm ..................................282 Test Pattern ........................................283 Precedence ..............................................187 Priority .......................201, 204, 215, 219, 224 Protection Mode .......................................294 Prx resolution ..........................................269 PTOS/DSCP Delay .................................................187 DSCP .................................................187 IP v4 DSCP .........................................187 IP v6 DSCP .........................................187 Precedence .........................................187 Queue Pri ...........................................187 Reliab ................................................187 Throug ...............................................187 Value .................................................187 Ptx resolution ..........................................269
Port ........................................................211 Port 1 .....................................................222 Port A .....................................................211 802.1Q Default Vid ....................................212 Force Default VID ...........................215 Frame Egress Mode ........................214 Ingress Filtering Check ....................214 Port Based VLAN ............................215 MAC Learning .....................................212 Port ...................................................211 Priority Default Priority ...............................217 Priority ..........................................215 STP Path Cost ......................................219 Priority ..........................................219 Role ..............................................218 Status ...........................................218 STP ..............................................218 Version .........................................218 Port Based VLAN .............................. 200, 215 Port Configuration 2Mb/s EOC EOC ............................................... IP Address ...................................... IP NetMask ..................................... IP Unnumbered ............................... PPP Mode ....................................... Signal input .................................... Ethernet In band management ....................... IP Address ...................................... IP NetMask ..................................... MNGT/x Alarm Sev .......................... MNGT/x Cable Cross ........................ IP Over OSI EOC ............................................... EOC 2Mbit Side ............................... EOC Radio Side 1A ........................... Gosip Address ................................. IP Address ...................................... IP NetMask ..................................... Routing .......................................... Signal input .................................... LCT PPP IP PPP Address ................................ IP PPP NetMask ............................... IP Unnumbered ............................... PC IP Address ................................. Radio 1A IP Address ...................................... IP NetMask ..................................... IP Unnumbered ............................... PPP Mode .......................................
Q
QinQ ETH Type ........................................185 Queue Pri ................................................187
41 41 41 41 41 41 39 39 39 39 39 42 42 42 42 42 42 43 42 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 41
R
RADIO (T0) .............................................168 Radio 1A, communication port ..................... 40 Radio A ...................................................151 Radio Branch Label ...................................166 Radio configuration ...................................151 Radio switch Reset .................................................289 Rx Forced Switch .................................288 Tx Forced Switch .................................288 Tx Preferential ....................................289 Wait Time ...........................................289 Rate Control ............................................192 Real Fade Margin ......................................279 Real Fade Margin Ver. ...............................279 Real Type (equipment hardware) ................127 Received Path Trace .................................242 Received Trace .........................................233 Reliab .....................................................187 Remote Element Table ............................... 54 Remote equipment list ............................... 54 Remote IP ...............................................279 RF channel ..............................................266 Role ..........................203, 205, 218, 222, 224 Routing Table ........................................... 46 Routing Table (Running) ............................. 46 Routing Table (Stored) ............................... 47 RT PSU ...................................................268 Running Default Gateway ........................... 44 Running Routing Table ............................... 44 Rx Forced Switch ......................................288
PPP, protocol .............................................. 9 PRBS BER ...................................................282 E1 Signal ............................................284 Elapsed Time ......................................282 Errors ................................................282 Fail Alarms .........................................282
324
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................164 RxPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 95
S
S/N ........................................................277 SCT/LMT .................................................... 9 SD memory card Automatic data restore from SD ............112 Automatic SW download from SD ..........112 EC serial number .................................112 EC system version ...............................112 Not running Sw delete ..........................112 Status ................................................112 SW system version ..............................112 Type ..................................................112 Sent Trace ...................................... 233, 242 Serial Number (equipment hardware) .........127 Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-12) ..............246 Signal Label (VC-12) .................................249 Signal Label (VC-4) ..................................244 Expected Label ....................................243 Received Signal Label ..........................243 Sent Label ..........................................243 SNTP Main Server IP Address ........................107 Polling Interval ....................................107 Polling Retries .....................................107 Polling Timeout ...................................107 Reserve Server IP Address ....................107 Source ....................................................173 Source E1 ...............................................172 Speed/Duplex ..........................................195 Start/Stop ...............................................282 Status ....................... 203, 205, 218, 223, 225 Status Control .........................................173 Status signal ............................................ 34 STM-1 ....................................................168 STM-1 MST Mode .....................................153 STM-1 switch Direction ............................................294 MSP Protection ....................................293 Protection Mode ..................................294 Switch Status .....................................292 Wtr Clear ...........................................294 Wtr Time (Min) ...................................294 STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ................................168 Stored Default Gateway ............................. 48 Stored Routing Table ................................. 48 STP ........................................................218 Force Version ......................................220 Forward Delay ....................................221 Hello Time ..........................................221 LAN-1 ................................................222 LAN-2 ................................................222 LAN-3 ................................................222 LAN-4 ................................................222 MAC Address ......................................223 Max Age .............................................222 Port 1 ................................................222
Priority ...............................................224 Role ...................................................222 Status ................................................223 Version ..............................................223 STP/ELP .......................................... 204, 206 Switch Status ..........................................292 Sync Enable .............................................153 Sync Loss Alarm .......................................282 Synchronisation E1 Retiming ........................................175 Internal Source ...................................168 Manual Operation ................................171 Manual Switch .....................................172 NODAL 1 (T0) .....................................168 RADIO (T0) ........................................168 Source ...............................................173 Source E1 ...........................................172 Status Control .....................................173 STM-1 ................................................168 STM-1/NODAL 2 (T0) ...........................168 T0 .....................................................169 T2/T3 1 ..............................................168 T2/T3 2 ..............................................168 TE LAN-3 ............................................168 TE LAN-4 ............................................168 Timing Sink Priority ..................... 169, 171 Trib. A ...............................................174 Trib. B ...............................................174 System Password .....................................138
T
T0 ..........................................................169 T2/T3 1 ...................................................168 T2/T3 2 ...................................................168 Tagged ...................................................188 TE LAN-3 .................................................168 TE LAN-4 .................................................168 Test Pattern .............................................283 Throug ....................................................187 Timeout, user ..........................................137 Timing Sink Priority .......................... 169, 171 Total Bytes Received .................................275 Total Frames Received ..............................275 Transmitter Control ..................................209 Trib. A ....................................................174 Trib. B ....................................................174 Tx Forced Switch ......................................288 Tx Frequency Selector ...............................266 Tx Power Constant Peak Mode ....................159 Tx Power Control ......................................269 Tx Power Mode ........................................157 Tx Preferential .........................................289 Tx Switch Control .....................................165 Tx Transmitter .........................................268 TXPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 98 Type ........................................................ 26
325
U
Undersize Frames .....................................275 Unmodified ..............................................188 Untagged ................................................188 Upper Modulation .....................................160 User NMS5UX .............................................140 Read and Write ...................................137 Read Only ..........................................136 System ..............................................140 User Force Logout ....................................135 User list ..................................................140 Utente Station Operator .................................137
V
Valid Bytes Received .................................275 Valid Frames Received ..............................275 Value ......................................................187 Version ...................... 203, 205, 218, 223, 225 WEB LCT ............................................. 13 VLan Label .................................................188 Lan1 ..................................................188 Lan2 ..................................................188 Lan3 ..................................................188 Lan4 ..................................................188 Port A ................................................188 Tagged ..............................................188 Unmodified .........................................188 Untagged ...........................................188 VLan ID .............................................188 VLan ID ..................................................188
W
Wait Time ...............................................289 Wake Up trap Disable ..............................................109 Enable ...............................................109 Gosip Address .....................................109 NE Location ........................................109 NMS IP Address ..................................109 Timeout .............................................109 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU, application ............. 12 WEB Lct Console ......................................... 9 WEB LCT version ......................................122 Wtr Time ......................................... 294, 297
326
GLOSSARY
A
Alarm Signal of a failure created by an error or by a malfunctioning of the equipment or of one of its elements. ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control. Device for the automatic control of the transmitted power. Auto negotiation The auto negotiation procedure allows the port automatically adjusting the speed and the modality of the data transmission without the intervention of the end user to optimise these parameters.
B
BER (measure) This measure allows to check (in normal functioning conditions of the equipment and without interrupting the traffic) the quality of the signal received by the equipment. Block The wording block refers to a group of bit (PM measurements - BBE control parameter).
F
Firmware of the equipment Assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the entire equipment (firmware of the main controller firmware of the peripheral units). Full-Duplex (modality) The transmission takes place contemporary in the two directions, in such a way the devices can transmit and receive at the same time.
H
Half-Duplex (modality) The transmission takes place in the two directions, but in only one direction at a time.
L
Local equipment Equipment which you are connected to. Local User Input Signal that enters into the local equipment from the user connector and its open close status (programmable) is reported as alarm or status signal.
327
M
MAC Address Equipment physical address composed by 6 bytes. The first 3 bytes points out the manufacturing company of the equipment, the remaining 3 ones the production serial number different for each equipment.
Manual Operation Timeout Time after which the manual forcing is automatically removed.
N
Network password This password is necessary to be able to activate the connection with the remote equipment.
O
OSI network Network where it is used also the OSI (Open System Interconnection) protocol as communication protocol between the network elements.
P
PRBS Pseudo Random Binary Sequence. Control functionality, integrated in the base band, that allows inserting a PRBS data stream on a 2Mbit/s stream for test operation and measurement of the error rate.
R
Reduced Capacity Alarm Alarm generated when the change of modulation and the consequent reduction of capacity take place. Remote Element Table List that contains all the information concerning the network equipment. The remote equipment list has to be set by the user and it can be increased or changed at every time. Remote equipment Equipment defined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment. Remote User Input Signal in input to the remote equipment, through the user connector and that is returned in output from the local equipment through relays contacts (user output) or user connectors.
S
Signal associated to one UO Associating one or more signals to an user output means that the activation of the signal or of the signals associated to the UO will be signalled outside by the activation of the user output. Server NTP (functionality) Functionality that, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update the date/time of the equipment using an element within the network as reference (Server NTP functionality). Software reset The software reset consists of initialising again all the communication channels (for instance with the WEB LCT) of the equipment.
328
Status signal Signals that refer to every event that does not point out a malfunctioning but a status change, an operation on progress or a functioning indication.
T
Tag 4 byte optional field, containing the priority and the VLan identifier. Tributary A First E1 tributary of base board. Tributary B Second E1 tributary of base board.
U
User list List of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment. User Output Signal that the equipment makes available on rack as relay contact. User timeout Period when, if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page, the user is automatically disconnected and, as consequence, even the equipment is disconnected.
W
Wait Time Time that the controller keep the service on not preferential branch before coming back to the preferential branch. In this way the controller doesnt continuously switch between the branches in present of fleeting alarms. Wake Up (functionality) Functionality that allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a remote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
329
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the company manufacturing the product.
330

Siaem

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siaem

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU

MN.00237.E - 003 Volume 1/1

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU Contents

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT APPLICATION

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Limit 100 30 2* 2 400

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

START-UP FROM BROWSER

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection)

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Fig.3 WEB LCT page (local and remote equipment)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

START-UP FROM SCT/LMT

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Fig.4 WEB LCT page (local equipment)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE

Fig.5 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA

Fig.6 info/status equipment area (WEB LCT page)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

1+1. Color box:

ManOp. Activation status of the manual operations. If the box is of color:

x C. Operating temperature of the equipment. If the box is of color:

<radio configuration>. Wording:

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

To verify the version of the WEB LCT application

To execute the login of the user

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

To execute the logout of the user

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Fig.7 Main Menu commands (WEB LCT page)

Fig.8 Equipment Menu commands (WEB LCT page)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

Fig.9 Contextual area (WEB LCT page)

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 003

EVENTS LIST AREA

For more information about the status/alarm signals, refer to pag.34.

Fig.10 Events list area (WEB LCT page)